JP7388764B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, in order to make the player clearly aware that the reach effect has developed, there have been machines that perform the reach effect after performing the development effect (for example, the "fusuma effect" in FIG. 14 of Patent Document 1) ”).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-121404

However, after the reach effect ends (for example, ends after notifying the loser), no effect is performed at all, so some players may not be able to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and may lose interest in the game. It was also a contributing factor to the decline in

In view of these circumstances, the present invention aims to prevent a decline in interest in games.

In order to solve such problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that includes a main control means, an effect control means, and an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the main control means is , a determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player; and an identification information display for displaying the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display when the determination is made; and a command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined command, the effect control means being capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmitting means, and varying the symbol corresponding to the identification information. , It is possible to execute a variable performance that can notify the result of the determination in response to temporarily stopping the symbol and then permanently stopping the symbol, and in the variable performance, a reach performance according to the result of the determination. is possible, and the result of the determination is announced at a predetermined timing after the start of the ready-to-reach effect , and after the ready-to-reach effect is ended by the notification of the result of the determination , but before the symbols are fixed and stopped. A specific image can be displayed , and while the specific image is displayed , the symbol can be made difficult to see, and the operating means is operated during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. It is possible to execute an operation effect that makes the player expect it depending on the specific image, and it is possible to cause the validity period related to the operation effect to occur before the specific image is displayed. While displaying , generation of the validity period related to the operation performance can be restricted , and the symbol can be changed into a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode, Before displaying the specific image, it is possible to make the pattern visible in the first mode, and after finishing displaying the specific image, it is possible to make the pattern visible in the second mode. be .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in gaming.

It is an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is an example of a perspective view of a gaming machine with a glass frame opened. It is an example of a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. This is an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a setting data table at the end of a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example of the special electric accessory operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening mode determination table for a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table regarding a normal symbol and a starting movable piece. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the general map general electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing auxiliary game processing on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing command analysis processing (1) in the production control section. It is a diagram showing command analysis processing (2) in the production control section. It is a figure which shows the variable production pattern determination process in a production control part. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern decision table. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reach notice determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up pattern determination table. (c) is a diagram showing an example of a roulette pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach notice determination table, (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a character group pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of a decorative member operation number determination table. be. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. (a) is a diagram showing command reception interrupt processing in the overall control unit, and (b) is a diagram showing V blank interrupt processing in the overall control unit. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating animation pattern setting processing in the overall control unit. It is a time chart 1 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is animation 1 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 2 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 3 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 4 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. It is a figure which shows the music structure for every variable production pattern. It is a time chart 2 showing details of each variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 3 showing details of each variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 4 showing details of each variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 5 showing details of each variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 6 showing details of each variable performance pattern. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of pseudo-runs and the degree of appearance of a specific image, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the degree of appearance of a specific image when there is a loss and when there is a jackpot. This is animation 5 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 6 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 7 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 8 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. (a) is a diagram showing the allocation ratio of performance symbols when the normal reach is lost, and (b) is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the performance symbols when the SP reach or higher is lost. This is animation 9 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. (a) is a diagram illustrating the distribution ratio of performance symbols when the symbol incitement is successful, and (b) is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the performance symbols when the design incitement is unsuccessful. This is an animation 10 corresponding to a variable performance pattern. This is an animation 11 corresponding to a variable performance pattern. It is a diagram showing displayable operation promotion images and executable timings for each variable performance pattern. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the 1st operation promotion image and the 2nd operation promotion image of SP reach or more (at the time of loss). (a) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of operation promotion images at the time of loss and at the time of jackpot (SP reach or higher) in the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state, and (b) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of the operation promotion image in the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows the selection ratio of the 2nd operation promotion image at the time of a loss and the time of a jackpot (SP reach or more) in a state. It is a diagram showing the number of vibrations of the effect button and executable timing for each variable effect pattern. It is a time chart 7 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is an animation 12 corresponding to a variable performance pattern. It is a time chart 8 showing details of each variable performance pattern. This is animation 13 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing error-related commands and priorities. This is an animation 14 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is animation 15 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. This is an animation 16 corresponding to the variable performance pattern. It is a diagram showing a modification of the number of vibrations of the performance button and the executable timing for each variable performance pattern.

Embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in an embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the glass frame opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 60 that is attached to island equipment of a gaming parlor, and a glass frame 50 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 60 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 in which a game ball 200 flows is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), a production button 35 for changing the production mode by pressing, and at least two direction (main) In the embodiment, a cross button 36 that can be pressed in four directions is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., and performs sound effects. Further, the frame illumination device 34b is designed to perform lighting effects by changing the direction of light emitted from each lamp and the color of the emitted light, and is provided at a plurality of positions.

The performance button 35 is provided with a performance button detection switch 35a, and when the performance button detection switch 35a detects an operation by the player, a further performance is executed in response to this operation. Similarly, the cross button 36 is also provided with a cross button detection switch 36b, and is configured to allow the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In particular, in this embodiment, the production button 35 is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction by a production button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4). Further, the production button 35 can be changed from a first mode (non-vibrating mode) to a second mode (vibrating mode) by a production button drive motor 35b (not shown).

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 that fires game balls toward the game area 6 when rotated, and a tray 40 that stores a plurality of game balls. , it has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down in the direction of the operating handle 3 (see FIG. 2). A receiving port for receiving game balls is provided at the end of the downward slope of this receiving tray 40, and the game balls received in this receiving port are moved to the glass frame 50 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 4b. Game balls are sent out one by one to a ball sending opening 41 provided on the back side.

Then, the game balls sent out to the ball feeding opening 41 are guided to the downwardly inclined end of the shooting rail 42, which has a downward slope in the direction of the shooting member 4c. A stopper 43 for stopping the game ball is provided above the downwardly sloped end of the firing rail 42, and the game ball sent out from the ball feeding opening 41 is placed above the downwardly sloped end of the firing rail 42. One game ball will be stopped at the station (see FIG. 2).

When the player touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operating handle 3 detects that the operating handle 3 and the player are in contact. After that, when the player rotates the operating handle 3, the firing volume 3b directly connected to the operating handle 3 also rotates, the firing volume 3b adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is fired at the adjusted firing intensity. The punching member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a rotates. By rotating this ejecting member 4c, the ejecting member 4c ejects the game ball 200 stored at the downwardly inclined end of the ejecting rail 42, and the game ball is ejected into the game area 6.

The game ball fired as described above rises between the rails 5a and 5b from the launch rail 42 and passes the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and then falls freely within the game area 6. do. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 6.

In the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are various winning holes (general winning hole 12, normal symbol gate 13, first starting hole 14, second starting hole 15, first big winning hole 16, second big winning hole). 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31.

Further, a starting port lamp 14b is provided inside the first starting port 14, and the starting port lamp 14b changes the color of a hold icon, which will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14, for example. When the hold icon is displayed, it is possible to emit light in a color that corresponds to the color of the hold icon. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the pending icon is changed to a green pending icon, the starting port lamp 14b can also emit green light.
In addition to the normal color of white, the hold icon can change to blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow colors, and the starting port lamp 14b can also emit light in a color corresponding to this color. .

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol reservation display device 23. , a second special symbol retention display 24 and a normal symbol retention display 25 are provided.

At the lower left side of the gaming area 6, a game ball fired (so-called left-handed hit) toward the left side area of the gaming area 6 can win (enter a ball), and can be fired toward the right side area of the gaming area 6. There are three general winning holes 12 in which game balls that are hit to the right (so-called right-handed balls) cannot win prizes, and at the lower right side of the gaming area 6, game balls that are hit to the right can win prizes (enter balls). One general winning hole 12 is provided in which a game ball hit to the left cannot win.

Here, each general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a for detecting winning of a game ball. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 12, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) will be paid out from the payout device for paying out game balls. .

At the lower center of the gaming area 6, there is a first starting opening 14 that constitutes a starting area where game balls hit to the left can win, but game balls hit to the right cannot win, and a game ball hit to the left. , and a second starting port 15 that constitutes a starting area where a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (enter a ball) are provided vertically side by side.

The second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b that constitutes a normal electric accessory (starting port opening/closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls into the second starting port 15, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid. 15c, and a closed state (closed mode) in which the movable starting piece 15b stands vertically by the operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c and restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 15. , the starting movable piece 15b is tilted and controlled to be converted into an open state (open mode) in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 15. When the second starting port 15 is in the open state, the movable starting piece 15b functions as a tray that guides the game ball to the second starting port 15, so the game ball is more easily directed to the second starting port 15 than when it is in the closed state. The chances of winning a prize (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting winning of the game ball (ball entering), and the second starting port 15 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting winning of the game ball (ball entering). ) is provided with a second starting port detection switch 15a. Then, when it is detected that a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, a random number value for determining a jackpot is obtained for performing a "jackpot lottery (jackpot determination)" to be described later.

In addition, when it is detected that a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, in addition to the above-mentioned random number for determining a jackpot, a random number for determining a special symbol is used to determine a special symbol to be stopped and displayed. , A random number value for reach determination and a random number value for special symbol variation are also acquired to determine the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special figure variation are referred to as special figure determination information. In addition, when the special symbol is fluctuating, it is called a "fluctuation display", and when the special symbol stops fluctuating and is displayed in a stopped state (completely stopped and displayed without moving), it is called a "fixed stop display". Sometimes.

Further, when it is detected that a game ball enters the first starting port 14, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when it is detected that a game ball enters the second starting port 15, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 15 may be the same.

On the left and right sides of the game area 6, normal symbol gates 13 are provided which constitute normal areas through which game balls can pass.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting passage (intrusion) of a game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a random number value for winning determination is obtained for performing a "winning lottery (winning determination)" which will be described later.

In addition, when the passage of a game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned random value for determining a hit, a random value for determining a regular symbol to determine the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and a fluctuation time of the regular symbol. A random number value for general pattern fluctuation for determination is also obtained. In addition, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for normal symbol determination, and the random number value for regular symbol variation are referred to as regular symbol determination information.

In the area on the right side of the gaming area 6, there is a first grand prize opening 16 in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize, but a game ball hit to the left cannot win a prize, and a second grand prize opening. The openings 17 are vertically spaced apart (separated by a width that allows a game ball to pass through).

The first big winning hole 16 is a first big winning hole opening/closing device that constitutes a first special electric accessory (first big winning hole opening/closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls into the first big winning hole 16. It has a door 16b and a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, and when the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c operates, the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b stands approximately vertically and the first big winning opening 16 is opened. A closed state (closed mode) that restricts the winning of game balls into the first grand prize opening 16, and an open state (open mode) in which the first grand prize opening opening/closing door 16b is tilted to allow the winning of game balls into the first grand prize opening 16. The conversion is controlled by When the first big winning opening 16 is in the open state, the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b functions as a saucer that guides the game ball to the first big winning opening 16, so compared to when it is in the closed state, the first big winning opening is The winning chance (winning ratio) of game balls entering the winning hole 16 increases.

Here, the first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a for detecting winning of a game ball. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first big prize opening 16, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second grand prize opening 17 is a second grand prize opening opening/closing device that constitutes a second special electric accessory (second grand prize opening opening/closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls into the second grand prize opening 17. It has a door 17b and a second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, and when the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c operates, the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b stands approximately vertically and the second grand prize opening 17 is opened. A closed state (closed mode) that restricts the winning of game balls into the second grand prize opening 17, and an open state (open mode) in which the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b is tilted to allow the winning of game balls into the second grand prize opening 17. The conversion is controlled by When the second big prize opening 17 is in the open state, the second big prize opening opening/closing door 17b functions as a saucer that guides the game ball to the second big prize opening 17. The winning chance (winning ratio) of game balls entering the winning hole 17 increases.

Here, the second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17a for detecting winning of the game ball. Then, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the second big prize opening 17, preset prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 16 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 17 may be made different.

At the bottom of the gaming area 6, there are prizes (balls entered) in any of the general winning hole 12, first starting hole 14, second starting hole 15, first big winning hole 16, and second big winning hole 17. An outlet 11 is provided for discharging unplayed game balls out of the game area.

Further, in the center of the gaming area 6, an image display device 31 configured with an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided. Note that two or more image display devices 31 may be provided.

This image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when no game is being played, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three performance patterns 38 (left performance pattern 38a, middle performance pattern 38b, right performance pattern 38c) are displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot lottery result in a variable performance described later, and when a specific performance pattern 38 By displaying a combination (for example, 777, etc.) in a fixed and fixed manner, a jackpot will be announced as a jackpot lottery result, and by displaying a fixed and fixed combination other than the specific performance symbol 38 (for example, 289, etc.), a jackpot will be announced. Loss will be announced as the lottery result.

This production pattern 38 starts to be displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol that is executed based on the winning (ball entry) of a game ball into the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. , A fixed stop display is performed in accordance with the fixed stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. That is, the timing of the variable display of the production pattern 38 and the special symbol and the timing of the fixed stop display of the production pattern 38 and the special symbol correspond to each other. Incidentally, the fact that the performance symbols 38 are being varied is sometimes referred to as a "fluctuating display," and the fact that the performance symbols 38 have stopped fluctuating and displayed in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as a "determined stop display." In addition, in the production pattern 38, a ``temporary stop display'' may be performed before the ``confirmed stop display'', but the ``temporary stop display'' will be described later.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 43(b) T1 to T2, the effect pattern 38 is made up of a character image as a first component and a number image as a second component. It is configured.
In addition, the effect pattern 38 is a scene (for example, T6 to T7 in FIG. ), and scenes (for example, T4 to T5 in FIG. 43(c)) that are composed only of numeric images that are the second component.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 15, fluctuations occur. In the performance, the same type of performance symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner and fixedly stopped. However, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 15, different types of performance symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner and fixedly stopped. It may be configured as follows. Incidentally, the fluctuating display (fluctuation direction, fluctuating manner) of the performance pattern 38, and performances performed together with the fluctuating display (display performance, sound performance, light emission performance) are sometimes referred to as "fluctuation performance."

In addition, among the combinations of specific performance symbols 38 for which a jackpot is announced, the combination "777" is a combination that will confirm the third jackpot (a combination that is only selected at the time of the third jackpot) in FIG. 7, which will be described later. .
On the other hand, among the combinations of specific performance symbols 38 for which a jackpot is announced, combinations other than "777" (for example, "666") are possible for either the first jackpot or the third jackpot in FIG. 7, which will be described later. It is also a certain combination (a combination that is selected in both cases of the first jackpot and the third jackpot).
That is, the "7 symbols" are symbols that suggest that a second special game (for example, a second jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game (for example, a first jackpot) will be executed. However, other than the 7 symbols, for example, the "6 symbols" can be said to be symbols that suggest that the first special game (for example, the first jackpot) will be executed.

In addition, if a combination other than 7 symbols, for example "6 symbols", is displayed and results in a jackpot, when the jackpot game is being played, a predetermined effect will be used to indicate that after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot will be lower. It is notified whether it will be a probability game state or a high probability game state.

In addition, on the lower right end side of the display section of the image display device 31, three small effect symbols 38d (see FIG. 43, etc.) for notifying the jackpot lottery result in the variable effect are displayed vertically (in this embodiment, upwardly It is displayed in a variable manner by scrolling down.

The variable display of the small performance symbol 38d is started in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. and will be stopped. In other words, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the small effect pattern 38d is displayed in a variable manner, and depending on the fluctuation state of the small effect pattern 38d, the first special symbol or , the execution state of the variable display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

In addition, like the performance pattern 38, the small performance pattern 38d is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and in the fixed stop display of the small performance pattern 38d, the small performance pattern is It is designed to stop for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect symbols 38d such as "777" or a combination of regular small effect symbols 38d such as "357", and the losing mode is a combination of small effect symbols 38d with regularity such as "357". This is an aspect other than that.
It should be noted that the small presentation pattern 38d is a pattern with a smaller display size compared to the presentation pattern 38. For example, the display size etc. of the effect pattern 38 may change before reaching SP reach and after reaching SP reach, but even if the display size changes, the size of the small effect pattern 38d may change. The relationship remains unchanged. That is, the small effect pattern 38d is always a pattern whose display size is smaller than the effect pattern 38.
Note that the small effect pattern 38d may always be displayed in a larger size than the effect pattern 38, or the small effect pattern 38d may be displayed in a larger size than the effect pattern 38.

In addition, in the display area of the image display device 31, out of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 14, a special figure of which the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undetermined) is displayed. In order to display the first special symbol reservation number (U1) indicating the number of figure determination information as an icon so that the player can easily grasp the number, and the special symbol obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15. Among the determination information, the second special symbol pending number (U2), which indicates the number of special symbol determination information for which the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undetermined), is displayed as an icon so that the player can easily understand it. A pending icon display area 31b and a variable icon display area 31a are provided for displaying icons so that the player can easily grasp information indicating special figure determination information during variable display (variable effect). (See Figure 43, etc.).

Although the description is omitted in FIG. 43 etc., when both the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) exist, one of the respective reservation icons is displayed in the reservation icon display area 31b. The parts are displayed overlapping each other. In addition, the reservation icon display area 31b may be provided for the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), respectively.

In addition, in the following explanation, the icon displayed in the pending icon display area 31b is referred to as the "pending icon (special figure determination information for which jackpot determination has not been performed and corresponds to pending information)" and the icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31a. The displayed icon is referred to as "the relevant variable icon (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has been executed and the variable display (variable effect) is being executed, and corresponds to execution information)".

The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion standing up from the game board 2 on its outer periphery so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. It is being

In addition, a board lighting device 34a having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) is provided on both the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, and the title (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the top of the decorative member 7. A first decorative member 33a (performance accessory) imitating a "signboard" is provided, and a second decoration member 33b (performance accessory) imitating a "sword" is provided on the right side of the decoration member 7.

This first decorative member 33a is driven by a panel drive device 33 composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., and can move vertically (actuate from an initial position to an operating position). By movement, it can be moved to the front of the image display device 31 (operated from the initial position to the operating position). Similarly, the second decorative member 33b is also driven by the board drive device 33, and can be moved to the front of the image display device 31 by falling to the left using the lower part of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum. The second decorative member 33b is composed of a sheath portion 33b1 imitating a sheath and a blade portion 33b2 housed in the sheath, and the blade portion is driven by the board drive device 33 to move in the vertical direction ( from the initial position to the operating position).

Note that a liquid crystal display may be provided on at least one of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b, and at least one of the pending icon display area and the variable icon display area may be provided on the liquid crystal display. The reserved icon display area may be provided on one of the liquid crystal display provided on the decorative member 33a and the liquid crystal display provided on the second decorative member 33b, and the variable icon display area may be provided on the other.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the first special symbol for a predetermined period of time to display the lottery result (judgment result) of a jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) that is executed based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 14. The first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is permanently displayed.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15, and displays the second special symbol for a predetermined period of time. The notification is made by displaying the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result in a fixed manner after being displayed in a variable manner, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and/or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be constituted by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the player wins a jackpot, the number "7" may be permanently displayed, and if the player loses, the number "-" may be displayed.

Here, the "jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the obtained jackpot determination random number is This refers to the process of determining whether a random number corresponds to a "jackpot" (jackpot determination).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a jackpot game ( This means that the player has acquired the right to play a special game that is advantageous to the player.

In the "jackpot game", a round game in which the first big prize opening 16 (first special electric accessory) or the second big prize opening 17 (second special electric accessory) is opened is played with a special electric accessory. A predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or 16 times) is performed by operating the accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the .

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operating time of the special electric accessory) of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 in each round game, and during this time the first big winning hole When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) enter the winning hole 16 or the second large winning hole 17, one round game ends. In other words, a "jackpot game" is a game in which a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the entered ball. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during a variable display of special symbols or a jackpot game (special game), the jackpot lottery cannot be performed immediately. In such cases, the right to draw a jackpot will be reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters) into the first starting port 14 is stored as the first hold, up to a maximum of four pieces, and the game ball is entered into the second starting port 15. The special figure determination information acquired when a ball wins (enters a prize) is stored as a second reservation, up to a maximum of four pieces. The first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of first reservations, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the number of second reservations, are the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation number, respectively. It is displayed on the symbol reservation display 24.

In addition, when there is one first reservation, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol reservation display 23 lights up, and when there are two first reservations, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol reservation display 23 lights up. Two LEDs will light up. In addition, when there are three first holds, three LEDs from the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold display 23 flash and the right LED lights up, and when there are four first holds, the first Four LEDs light up from the leftmost end of the special symbol reservation display 23. Also, on the second special symbol reservation display 24, the number of second reservations is displayed in the same manner as above.

In addition, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the gaming area 6 of the game board 2 displays the lottery result (judgment) of a winning lottery (win determination) that is triggered by a game ball passing through the regular symbol gate 13. (Result) is notified by fluctuating the normal symbols for a predetermined period of time and then stopping and displaying the normal symbols of the type corresponding to the lottery result, and is made up of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs, etc. has been done.

Here, the "winning lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a random number value for hit determination is acquired, and the acquired random number value for hit determination is a random number value that corresponds to a "win". Refers to the process of determining whether or not the item is true (hit determination).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, "winning" means that the player has acquired the right to perform an advantageous auxiliary game in a winning lottery that is executed based on the passing of a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. say. In the "auxiliary game", the movable starting piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 15 and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the winning. In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, as with special symbols, under certain conditions, if a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 and a winning lottery cannot be performed immediately during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol or during auxiliary games, The right to draw a prize is reserved.

More specifically, the normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 is stored as the third hold, up to a maximum of four pieces. The number of normal symbol reservations (G), which is the number of third reservations, is displayed on the normal symbol reservation display 25 in the same manner as the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that visibly covers the gaming area 6 in front of the gaming board 2 (on the player's side). Note that the glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50.

The glass frame 50 is connected to an outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism section 51 at one end side in the left-right direction (for example, on the left side when facing the gaming machine 1), and the glass frame 50 is connected to an outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism section 51. The other end side (for example, the right side when directly facing the gaming machine 1) can be rotated in a direction in which the outer frame 60 is opened. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52, and can open the inner part of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 by rotating like a door about the hinge mechanism part 51 as a fulcrum.

A locking mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided at the other end of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction. The locking mechanism can be unlocked using a special key. Further, the glass frame 50 is also provided with a door open switch 133 that detects whether the glass frame 50 is opened from the outer frame 60 or not.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, etc. are provided. Further, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying power to the gaming machine 1 and a power switch (not shown).

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first starting opening detection switch 14a, and inputs various detection signals such as the first starting opening detection switch 14a and the first special symbol display device 20 and the first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c. etc. to control the game.

This main control board 110 is connected to a production control board 120, a payout control board 130, and a power supply board 140. Communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 120 is configured such that data can be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 is Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Further, the main control board 110 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The main control board 110 also includes a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores programs for game control and various data and tables necessary for game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing. It includes at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port for main control (not shown), and a RAM clear switch 111a.

This main control input port includes a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 12, and a general winning opening detection switch 12a that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 13. a first starting port detection switch 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 14; a second starting port that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 15; Detection switch 15a, a first big winning hole detection switch 16a that detects that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 16, and a second big winning hole that detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 17. A winning opening detection switch 17a and a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the output port for main control includes the production control board 120, the payout control board 130, the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c that opens and closes the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting opening 15, and the first big prize opening opening/closing door. The first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c operates the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol displaying special symbols. A display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22 that displays normal symbols, a first special symbol pending display 23 and a second special symbol pending display 24 that display the number of reserved special symbols, and a normal symbol display device 24 that displays the number of reserved regular symbols. A symbol holding display 25, a round number display 66 that displays the corresponding round number when multiple types of round numbers are provided, and a round number display 66 that displays the corresponding number of rounds when it is provided with multiple types of round numbers; A right-hand display 67 that notifies the player of firing, a game information output terminal board 30 that outputs an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output from this output port for main control.

The main CPU 110a reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device and display, or uses the results of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In addition to the game control program, the main ROM 110b contains a jackpot determination table used for jackpot lottery (see Figure 5), a special symbol determination table (see Figure 6) for determining the special symbol to be displayed as a fixed stop, and a jackpot determination table (see Figure 6). A setting data table at the end of the jackpot game to determine the gaming state after the end (see Figure 7), a special electric accessory operation mode determination table (see Figure 8) that determines the opening/closing conditions of the big prize opening opening/closing door, and a big prize A mouth opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9), a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10) that determines the fluctuation pattern of special symbols, a hit determination table (see FIG. 11) that is referred to in the winning lottery, etc. are stored. There is. Note that the above-mentioned tables are merely listed as examples of characteristic tables among the tables in this embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) may be provided in the course of the game. ing.

The main RAM 110c includes a special pattern special electric processing data storage area, a general pattern general electric processing data storage area, a normal pattern reservation number (G) storage area, a normal pattern reservation storage area, a stopped general pattern data storage area, and a first special pattern reservation. number (U1) storage area, second special symbol retention number (U2) storage area, first random number storage area for jackpot determination, second random number storage area for jackpot determination, number of round games (R) storage area, number of openings (K) Storage area, big winning opening winning ball counter (C) Storage area, 2nd starting opening winning ball counter (D), starting opening number counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, number of time-saving games (J) storage area, game status buffer, stop special pattern data storage area, stop regular pattern data storage area, production transmission data storage area, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , various timer counters such as an auxiliary game timer counter are provided. Note that the storage area described above is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor. The game information output terminal board 30 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like.

The performance control board 120 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The production control board 120 includes a production control unit 120m that includes a sub CPU 120a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 120b that stores a production control program, a sub RAM 120c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image display device 31, and an audio output device. 32 (speaker), etc., a lamp/drive control section 160 that controls the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the board drive device 33, the production button drive motor 35b, etc. It is equipped with input ports and output ports for performance control.

The sub CPU 120a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 120b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 120c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. Control is performed in order to cause various control units (display/audio control unit 150, lamp/drive control unit 160) to execute various effects in accordance with input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b. output data or commands).

Further, upon receiving a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation mode of the special symbol from the main control board 110, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, Performance data (such as performance pattern designation commands to be described later) for causing the performance driving device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, and the performance button drive motor 35b to execute a predetermined performance is determined. Then, control for executing the variable effect is performed by transmitting the determined effect data to the display/audio control section 150 and the lamp/drive control section 160.

In addition to the program for effect control, the sub ROM 120b stores a variable effect pattern determination table for determining a variable effect pattern for executing a variable effect, and the like. Note that the above-mentioned tables are merely listed as examples of characteristic tables among the tables in this embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) may be provided in the course of the game. ing.

The sub-RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

An effect button detection switch 35a, a cross button detection switch 36b, etc. are connected to the input port of the effect control board 120. In the production control board 120, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 35 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 35a, and a cross button detection signal indicating that the cross button 36 has been operated is input from the cross button detection switch 36b. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

Here, by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to perform "volume adjustment" to adjust the volume of BGM, SE, etc. output from the audio output device 32. For example, the volume value can be adjusted in a range of 5 levels, from "1" which is the lowest volume value to "5" which is the highest volume value. . Further, the volume value is increased in stages by operating the upper button, and the volume value is decreased in stages by operating the lower button.

In addition, by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to adjust the amount of light emitted by the various LEDs of the panel lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b, and the amount of light emitted from the backlight of the image display device 31. It becomes. For example, the light intensity value can be adjusted in a range of 5 levels, from "1" which is the smallest light intensity value to "5" which is the largest light intensity value. . Further, by operating the right button, the light amount value is increased stepwise, and by operating the left button, the light amount value is decreased stepwise.

The display/audio control unit 150 receives commands from the production control unit 120m, and controls the image display device 31 to display a predetermined image, and the audio output device 32 to output a predetermined sound. do.

The display/audio control unit 150 includes an overall control unit 151 that includes an overall CPU 152 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 153 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 154 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP (as an image processor). An image control unit 155 consisting of a video display processor), a CGROM 156 in which image data etc. are stored, and a frame buffer etc. provided inside the image control unit 155 that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. A VRAM 157, an audio control unit 158 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 159 storing audio data, and input/output ports.

The general CPU 152 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the general ROM 153, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the general RAM 154 as a work area, thereby executing the operation clock received from the effect control unit 120m. In response to production instruction commands and the like, it controls the image control unit 155 and the audio control unit 158 to execute various productions (outputs data and commands).

The control ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM, etc., and displays a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, and animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns, anime scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the image production, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, etc. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), and drawing method. , various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 31 is included.

The image control unit 155 is connected to a CGROM 156 in which various types of image data are stored, and receives commands (display list, drawing commands, etc.) from the overall control unit 151 (overall CPU 152) and the image data stored in the CGROM 156. Based on this, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated. The image data includes images (frames) to be displayed on the image display device 31, for example, material data representing individual images such as production design images, background images constituting the background of production designs, character images, and dialogue images. It is. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame, which is formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

The CGROM 156 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). ing. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 156 is read out in units of image data by the image control unit 155, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Furthermore, the CGROM 156 stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color. Note that the CGROM 156 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without compressing all the image data. Further, as a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 157 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. This VRAM 157 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 151 (overall CPU 152), a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 155 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 156 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 157 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 151 (the overall CPU 152). , reads drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs it to the image display device 31 to display various images. .

Note that the image control unit 155 is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 is generated. ) is generated and output to the image display device 31. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 155 is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times.

Further, a general-purpose board 39 is connected between the image control section 155 and the image display device 31, which converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the converted image data. The general-purpose board 39 has a bridge function that converts image data into an image format compatible with the performance of the image display device 31 that displays the image data. It absorbs the difference in resolution between when connected and when an XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) 17-inch liquid crystal display device is connected.

The audio control unit 158 is connected to the audio output device 32, and outputs audio data and music data in accordance with the display on the image display device 31 based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 120m. (BGM, SE), etc. are controlled to be output from the audio output device 32.

The lamp/drive control unit 160 includes a lamp CPU 160a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 160b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 160c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 160a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 160b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 160c as a work area, thereby allowing the lamp CPU 160a to read out the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 160b, and perform calculation processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 160c as a work area. In response to received performance instruction commands, etc., control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

A board lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, a board drive device 33, and a production button drive motor 35b are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/drive control unit, and are connected to the production control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Based on the various kinds of effect data (including commands) sent, lighting control of various LEDs of the board lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b is performed to perform light emitting effects, etc. By controlling drive sources such as the motor of the button drive motor 35b and a solenoid, motion effects (the movement effects described above), etc. are performed.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control section 131 that controls the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 132 that controls the launch of the game balls.

This payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The payout control board 130 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

The payout CPU 131a reads out a program stored in the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from the payout ball count detection switch 135 that detects whether or not game balls have been paid out, the door open switch 133, and the timer. At the same time, corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the processing.

Further, a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage section is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU 131a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and also controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to issue a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU 131a.

The firing control unit 132 has a touch sensor 3a and a firing volume 3b connected to its input side, and a firing solenoid 4a and a ball feeding solenoid 4b to its output side. The firing control unit 132 inputs the touch signal from the touch sensor 3a, and controls the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b to be energized based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operating handle 3, and is constituted by a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by a player touching the operating handle 3. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 3, it outputs a touch signal to the firing control unit 132 to permit energization of the firing solenoid 4a. The firing control unit 132 is basically configured not to fire the game ball 200 into the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The firing volume 3b is provided directly connected to a rotating part through which the operating handle 3 rotates, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5V) applied to the firing volume 3b using a variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control section 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control section 132 is ). The firing control unit 132 energizes the firing solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the firing volume 3b, and rotates the firing member 4c directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a, thereby causing the game ball 200 to play. Fire it to area 6.

The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a firing member 4c is directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a, and the firing solenoid 4a rotates to rotate the firing member 4c.

Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to approximately 99.9 times/min based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control section 132. As a result, the number of firing games per minute is approximately 99.9 (games/minute) because one game is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates once. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feeding solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the receiving tray 40 one by one toward the hitting member 4c directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 is equipped with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, A power outage detection signal is output to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 110a becomes operational, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 110a becomes inactive. Note that the backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, but may be a battery, for example, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the state regarding the jackpot lottery includes a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state regarding the movable starting piece 15b of the second starting port 15 includes a "non-time saving gaming state". It has a "time saving gaming state". The states related to this jackpot lottery (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) and the states related to the starting movable piece 15b (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) can be related to each other, or can be independent. can. In other words,
(1) "Low probability time saving gaming state" which is a low probability gaming state and time saving gaming state;
(2) “Low probability non-time saving gaming state” which is a low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state;
(3) “High probability time saving gaming state” which is a high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state;
(4) It becomes possible to provide a "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. I will call it . Furthermore, the "low probability time-saving gaming state" will be referred to as the "time-saving gaming state" in this embodiment. Furthermore, the "high probability time saving gaming state" will be referred to as the "high probability gaming state" in this embodiment. Note that the "normal gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" may be collectively referred to as the "low probability gaming state."

In this embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that in a jackpot lottery that is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, the probability of winning the jackpot is For example, it refers to a gaming state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, a "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a low probability gaming state, and the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as, for example, 1/60. Therefore, in the "high probability gaming state", it is easier to win a jackpot than in the "low probability gaming state". Note that the change from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of a game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time-saving game state". This refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winning is won is likely to be set to be shorter than the "state". For example, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a winning lottery is carried out, and a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 22, but the normal symbol is displayed for 30 seconds after the variable display starts. Stop and display after. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 15 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that in a winning lottery executed based on the passage of a game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average variation of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time-saving game state". This is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winning is won is set to be shorter than the "state" and longer than the "non-time saving game state", for example, 3 seconds. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/16, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as high as, for example, 15/16. Set. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving game state". Thereby, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is set. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12.

(Jackpot judgment table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 14, and FIG. This is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball. In the tables of FIG. 5(a) and FIG. 5(b), the jackpot probability is the same.

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), the probability game state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result are associated with each other in the jackpot determination table.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), and determines that it is a "jackpot" based on the current probability game state and the acquired random value for jackpot determination. or “lost”.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a), when the game is in a low probability gaming state, two random numbers for jackpot determination, "7" and "8", are determined to be a jackpot. On the other hand, in a high probability gaming state, ten random numbers for jackpot determination from "7" to "16" are determined to be a jackpot. Note that if it is a random value other than the above, it is determined that it is a "lose".

Therefore, since the random number range for jackpot determination random numbers is from 0 to 599, the probability that it will be determined as a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and the probability that it will be determined as a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is 1/300. The probability is increased by 5 times to 1/60.

(Special design determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol that is fixed and displayed as a result of the variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a special symbol determination table for a loss, and FIG. 6(b) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the special symbol determination table in case of a loss includes the type of special symbol display device and information obtained when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. The special symbol determination random number value and the losing special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of loss special symbols and a random number value for special symbol determination may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of a loss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the special symbol determination table for the jackpot includes the type of special symbol display device (the type of starting hole where the game ball won) and the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole. A special symbol determination random number value obtained when a game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with a jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of special symbol display device, random number value for special symbol determination, etc.

Then, when the special symbols start changing, a performance symbol designation command is determined as special symbol information based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data). Here, each production design designation command is composed of 2 bytes of data, including 1 byte of MODE data to identify the classification of the control command, and 1 byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the variation pattern designation command, etc., which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) determines the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (see Figure 7) and the type of jackpot game (see Figure 8). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the gaming state after the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game. Therefore, in the column of special symbols in FIG. 6(b), explanations corresponding to the types of jackpot games are supplementarily described.

(Data table set at the end of jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a jackpot game end setting data table for determining the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 7, the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game includes the stop special symbol data of the special symbol, the game state buffer, the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (J), the probability game state, and the high probability. It is associated with the number of games played (X).

Here, the "gaming state buffer" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a time-saving gaming state (or a non-time-saving gaming state) and a high-probability gaming state (or a low-probability gaming state).

Specifically, if the game state buffer is "00H", the game state information of the low probability game state and the non-time save game state where both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set (that is, the normal game state ) is shown. If the gaming state buffer is "01H", it indicates gaming state information of a high probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set. If the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates game state information of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state where the time-saving game flag is set but the high-probability game flag is not set (that is, the time-saving game state). . If the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates game state information of a high probability game state and a time saving game state (that is, a high probability game state) in which both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set. Note that with the gaming machine specifications (specs) in this embodiment, the gaming state buffer will never be "01H", but in the gaming machine specifications (specs), although it is in a high probability gaming state, the visual notification If the specifications include a so-called "latent probability change" in which no changes are made, the gaming state buffer may become "01H".

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (J), and the probability based on the stop special symbol data of the special symbol and the game state buffer. Determine the gaming state and the number of high probability games (X).

As a feature of the data table set at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7 in this embodiment, for the "first jackpot", 100 times are given as the number of time-saving games (J), and 0 times as the number of high probability games (X). is awarded, and for the "second jackpot", 10,000 times are given as the number of time-saving games (J), 10,000 times are given as the number of high-probability games (X), and the "third jackpot" is given as the number of time-saving games (J). ) will be awarded 10,000 times, and the number of high probability games (X) will be awarded 10,000 times. Further, the "first jackpot" is given a low probability gaming state, and the "second jackpot" and the "third jackpot" are given a high probability gaming state.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessory operation mode determination table for determining the grand prize opening mode table. As will be described later, since a jackpot game is executed based on this jackpot opening mode table, it can be said that the jackpot opening mode table indicates the type of jackpot game. In this embodiment, the term "table" will be abbreviated as "TBL" as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 8, the special electric accessory operation mode determination table is associated with special symbol stop special symbol data and a big winning opening opening mode table.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the big winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special symbol data of the special symbol.

(Big prize opening table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the grand prize opening opening mode table determined in FIG. The opening and closing conditions are determined.

Specifically, this is a group of tables for determining the jackpot opening mode for jackpots that are referred to during jackpot games, and are comprised of a first jackpot table, a second jackpot table, and a third jackpot table.

The big winning hole opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9 includes the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 16 or second big winning hole 17) and the maximum number of rounds in one jackpot game. , the specified number indicating the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the big prize opening in one round, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game until the execution of the first round game, and the maximum number of openings of the big winning hole in each round game. , one opening time of the big winning slot in each round game, one closing time of the big winning slot in each round game, the interval time until the next round game is executed, and the end of the last round game. The ending time from to the end of the jackpot game is associated with it.

The main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot TBL, the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot TBL, and the third jackpot game based on the third jackpot TBL. Become.

According to the first jackpot TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first jackpot opening/closing door 16b is operated to open the first jackpot 16 on the right side of the gaming area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. The first jackpot game can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls enter the first grand prize opening 16 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of gaming ends. Then, when the 16 round game ends, the first jackpot game ends.

According to the second jackpot TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first jackpot opening/closing door 16b is operated to open the first jackpot 16 on the right side of the gaming area 6 for a maximum of one round for two rounds (twice). .A second jackpot game can be executed in which the game is opened for 8 seconds. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls enter the first grand prize opening 16 before the opening time elapses for 1.8 seconds, one round of gaming ends. Then, when the second round game ends, the second jackpot game ends.

According to the third jackpot TBL shown in FIG. 9, the second jackpot opening/closing door 17b is operated to open the second jackpot 17 on the right side of the gaming area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. A third jackpot game can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls enter the second grand prize opening 17 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of gaming ends. When the 16th round game ends, the third jackpot game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are three types of "jackpot games (special games)" from the first jackpot game to the third jackpot game, which have different jackpot openings and opening operations of the jackpot openings. Therefore, players can enjoy various special games.

Also, the opening time of the second jackpot game (1.8 seconds) is shorter than, for example, the opening time of the first jackpot game (29 seconds) and the opening time of the third jackpot game (29 seconds). Therefore, it can be said to be an "unfavorable opening mode."

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of special symbols as described later.

As shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting opening), jackpot determination result, special symbol (stop special symbol data), random number value for reach determination, and special symbol. The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the random number value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of special symbols" determines at least the jackpot determination result and the variation time of the special symbols. Moreover, since the configuration is such that when there is a jackpot, the reach is always performed, the random number for determining the reach is not referred to when there is a jackpot. The random number range for reach determination is set to 97 (0 to 96), and the random number range for special figure variation is set to 100 (0 to 99).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, fluctuation pattern (1) (normal fluctuation ) The variation time (T2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation). In addition, although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number. Note that hereinafter, "normal fluctuation 1" and "normal fluctuation 2" may be collectively referred to simply as "normal fluctuation."

The main CPU 110a refers to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation time are determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation.

Then, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the production control board 120.

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command, and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 14, and the MODE data is "E6H". When it is "E7H", it indicates a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting hole 15.

Further, in the performance control board 120, the performance contents of the performance symbols 38 and the like are determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern designation command), as will be described later. In the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the performance contents of the performance symbols 38 and the like are described for reference.

Here, as for the production content, "normal variation 1", "normal variation 2", and "shortened variation" mean that the multiple production symbols 38 vary at high speed and stop without reaching the reach. The difference between normal variation 1, normal variation 2, and shortened variation is that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than normal variation 1 and normal variation 2.

Furthermore, "reach" is a variation that gives the player a feeling of expectation of a jackpot, such as a temporary stop display of a part of the combination of performance symbols 38 that informs a jackpot, and fluctuations of other production symbols 38. means an aspect. For example, if a combination of three-digit performance symbols 38 "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 38 to notify a jackpot, two performance symbols 38 will be temporarily stopped and displayed at "7", and the remaining This refers to the manner in which the effect pattern 38 is changing. Note that "temporary stop display (temporary stop)" means that the performance symbols 38 are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 38 are stopped. Refers to the aspect.

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation level (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot expectation level") for executing a jackpot game in which two production symbols 38 temporarily stop and the remaining one production symbol 38 changes. are doing. In addition, in this embodiment, although a jackpot is not won by "normal reach", it may be configured so that a jackpot is won by "normal reach". Furthermore, "SP reach" means super reach, which has higher jackpot expectations than normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect pattern 38 that is not temporarily stopped makes a special change, the effect pattern 38 changes, the background image changes, and a special character is displayed. Moreover, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has higher jackpot expectations than the super reach. Also in "SPSP Reach", the effect pattern 38 changes, the background image changes, a special character is displayed, or, for example, a live-action image is displayed. In addition, "full rotation reach" means a mode in which the combinations of the plurality of performance symbols 38 that notify a jackpot are all set and fluctuate at a low speed, and in this embodiment, only when a jackpot lottery is won. It means the reach that is executed. Note that "SP reach" or "SPSP reach" is sometimes referred to as "SP reach or higher."

It should be noted that the production pattern 38 in "SP Reach" and "SPSP Reach" changes means that, for example, until "SP Reach" and "SPSP Reach", the production pattern 38 was composed of numbers + characters. However, after reaching "SP reach" or "SPSP reach", the production pattern 38 changes to only numbers, and when the production pattern 38 changes to only numbers, "SP reach" or "SPSP reach" This corresponds to the fact that the display size becomes smaller (changes smaller) than the display size of the effect pattern 38 up to "reach".

In this way, the performance pattern 38 has a scene composed of numbers + characters and a scene composed only of numbers in the variable production. For example, as shown in FIG. 43(c) T4 to T5, in a configuration consisting only of numbers, the decorativeness of the production pattern 38 itself is higher than in a configuration of numbers + characters as shown in FIG. 43(c) T6 to T7. It can be said that the effect pattern 38 itself has a high decorativeness when the number is low and the composition is composed of numbers and characters.
That is, in a scene where the player pays attention to whether or not a reach effect will be executed, there is a high possibility that the player is also paying attention to whether or not a reach effect will be executed, that is, to the effect pattern 38, so the effect pattern that is highly decorative is highly likely to be focused on. By using 38, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, in situations such as "SP Reach" where the player is focused on whether or not there will be a jackpot, there is a high possibility that the player will also be paying attention to the character image etc. rather than the production pattern 38. By using the effect pattern 38 with low decorativeness, it is possible to prevent the user from drawing too much attention to the effect pattern 38, and it is possible to make the user focus on the character image or the like.

In addition, "Number of pseudo consecutive notices" means "Number of times pseudo consecutive notices are executed", and "Pseudo continuous notices" means that during the fluctuating display of special symbols corresponding to one jackpot lottery, This means a notice based on a variation mode in which the pattern 38 is temporarily stopped and displayed and then changed again, and the effect pattern 38 is changed and temporarily stopped a plurality of times. Note that the number in parentheses in the number of pseudo-runs column indicates the number of times the pseudo-run is visually executed. For example, if the variation pattern is 17, the number of pseudo-runs is 3. This visually indicates that the fluctuation display is executed four times (pseudo four fluctuations).

In addition, to suggest the execution of the "pseudo continuous notice", it may be done using only the effect pattern 38, or a dedicated "pseudo continuous execution suggestion pattern" may be used.
For example, when suggesting the execution of a "pseudo continuous notice" using only the production pattern 38, it is also possible to suggest the execution of a "pseudo continuous notice" by temporarily stopping a combination of different odd number production symbols 38. That's fine, for example, temporarily stop displaying 5 symbols on the left performance pattern 38a, temporarily stop displaying 5 symbols on the middle performance pattern 38b, temporarily stop displaying 6 symbols on the right performance pattern 38c, and make a "pseudo continuous notice". ” may be suggested.
In addition, when suggesting the execution of a "pseudo consecutive notice" using a special "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion symbol", a new "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion symbol" (for example, NEXT symbol) is added to the medium effect pattern 38b. If the "pseudo consecutive execution suggestion symbol" (for example, NEXT symbol) stops, execution of the "pseudo consecutive notice" may be suggested.
Note that the "pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol" (for example, NEXT symbol) being stopped may be a temporary stop display like the production symbol 38, or may be a fixed stop display unlike the production symbol 38.

(Win determination table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 11(a), the hit determination table associates the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the random number value for hit determination, and the win determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a) and determines whether it is a "win" or "lose" based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random number value for winning determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a), when the game is in a non-time-saving gaming state, one specific random value for hit determination, "0", is determined to be a win. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, 15 random numbers for winning determination from "0" to "14" are determined to be a win. Note that if it is a random value other than the above, it is determined that it is a "lose". Therefore, since the random number range for winning determination is from 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a win in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a winning in the time-saving gaming state is 15. /16.

(Normal symbol determination table)
As shown in FIG. 11(b), the normal symbol determination table associates the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the hit determination result, the random value for normal symbol determination, and the regular symbol (stopped regular symbol data). There is.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(b), and determines the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the current time-saving gaming state, the hit determination result, and the acquired random value for determining the normal symbol. (stop general map data) is determined.

Then, when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol starts, the main CPU 110a determines the ordinary symbol designation command as the information of the ordinary symbol based on the determined type of ordinary symbol (stopped ordinary symbol data), and determines the determined ordinary symbol designation command. will be transmitted to the production control board 120.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11(d), since the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b is determined by the normal pattern (stop normal pattern data), the type of the normal pattern determines the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b. It can be said that it is decided.

(Public figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11(c) is a diagram showing a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern (such as fluctuation time) as described later.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random value for ordinary symbol variation, and the fluctuation time of ordinary symbols. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the variation time.

Then, when the normal symbol fluctuation starts, the main CPU 110a determines a regular symbol fluctuation designation command as information on the fluctuation time of the regular symbol based on the determined fluctuation time of the regular symbol, and determines the determined regular symbol fluctuation designation command. will be transmitted to the production control board 120.

As a feature of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11(c), the fluctuation time of the time-saving gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the non-time-saving gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is designed to be shorter than.

(Starting port opening mode determination table of starting movable piece)
As shown in FIG. 11(d), the starting port opening mode determination table includes the stop normal pattern data (normal pattern), the maximum number of openings of the starting movable piece 15b, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second starting port 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11(d) and determines the maximum number of openings of the starting movable piece 15b, opening time, opening time, closing time, interval time, Decide the ending time.

In this embodiment, in the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. The opening mode is an open mode, and the starting port opening mode based on the stop general map data = 03 is an opening mode that is more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop general map data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 11(b), when a win occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the stopped normal symbol data = 03, which is the most advantageous opening mode, will be selected. Thereby, in the time-saving game state, the starting movable piece 15b operates more advantageously for the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 12(a) shows the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, special symbol determination It is a figure showing a special figure judgment information storage area in which a random number value, a random number value for reach judgment, a random number value for special figure fluctuation) are stored, and FIG. 12(b) is a diagram of each storage part of the special figure judgment information storage area. FIG. 12(c) is a diagram showing the configuration, and FIG. 12(c) shows the normal pattern determination information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, normal pattern fluctuation) acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13. FIG. 12(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the normal figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information pending storage in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 14 is stored. area, a second special figure judgment information holding storage area in which special figure judgment information obtained based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 15 is stored, and special figure judgment information during execution of variable display is stored. The first special figure judgment information holding storage area and the second special figure judgment information holding storage area are each divided from the first storage part to the fourth storage part. There is.

Note that the number of pieces of undetermined special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage portions of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area becomes the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and these undetermined The number of pending icons corresponding to the special symbol determination information is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, and the number of undetermined special symbol determination information stored in the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is the second special symbol retention number. (U2), and the number of pending icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, and the special figure that is currently executing the variable display (variable effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area. The variable icon corresponding to the figure determination information is displayed in the variable icon display area 31a.

In addition, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c in the image display device 31 (see FIG. 43, etc.), and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is displayed in the image display device 31. It is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d in the device 31 (see FIG. 43, etc.). In addition, the number of reservations displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d may be simply referred to as a "retention number image." It should be noted that the "pending number image" merely notifies the number of pending games, and does not play a role in foretelling that a jackpot game may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for jackpot determination for storing a random number value for determining a jackpot, and a random number storage area for special symbol determination for storing a random number value for special symbol determination. area, a random number storage area for reach determination for storing the random number value for reach determination, and a random number storage area for special figure fluctuation pattern determination for storing the random number value for determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the first special figure determination information retention storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored. Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure determination information retention storage area. The acquired special figure determination information will be stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first memory of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the first special figure determination information is shifted. Referenced to execute variable display of symbols. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. Referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 12(c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes a normal figure determination information retention storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is stored; The ordinary figure execution storage area stores the ordinary figure determination information during the fluctuating display, and the ordinary figure determination information holding storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part. Note that the number of pieces of undetermined normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage portions of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage area is the normal symbol reservation number (G).

As shown in FIG. 12(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing random number values for hit determination, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing random number values for normal symbol determination. and a random number storage area for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern for storing random numbers for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 and the normal pattern judgment information is acquired, the normal pattern judgment information is not stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the normal pattern judgment information retention storage area. The acquired common figure determination information will be stored in the storage unit with the smallest number.

In the normal pattern execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage section of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted, and the normal pattern pattern execution storage area starts the variable display of normal symbols. Referenced for execution.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110.

When power is supplied by the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initialization processing consisting of steps S1 to S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process moves to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process moves to step S11.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c, and in step S4, compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power-off with the newly calculated checksum, and determines that the checksum is Determine whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process moves to step S5, and if the checksum is not normal, there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 110c (the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally). As such, the process moves to step S11.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is turned on. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not ON, processing is performed at the time of power restoration and the process moves to step S6; if the RAM clear switch 111a is ON, processing is performed at power-on. The process moves to step S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs RAM settings when the power is restored. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to restart the game from the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs initial settings of devices around the CPU in step S7. Specifically, the output settings to the production control board 120, the settings of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and executes the process in step S9. Move. As a result, a power recovery designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing power recovery notification.

Note that the power restoration notification refers to displaying a power restoration screen (image) on the image display device 31 indicating that the power has been restored (for example, FIG. 72), or displaying a power restoration screen (image) on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power has been restored, or This means outputting a recovery notification sound.

Note that the power recovery designation command may not include information indicating the current gaming state, and the gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state may be transmitted before or after transmitting the power restoration designation command.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol retention number (U1) and the second special symbol retention number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 is able to grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the image display device 31 displays the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon. Processing for displaying the pending number image will be performed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage designation command indicating the number of reserved symbols (G) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a normal symbol storage designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can grasp the number of normal symbols stored.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a clears all areas of the main RAM 110c, performs RAM settings at power-on, and moves the process to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, performs RAM settings at power-on, and moves the process to step S13. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

The main CPU 110a performs initial settings of devices around the CPU in step S13. Specifically, the output settings to the production control board 120, the settings of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and moves the process to step S15. As a result, a power-on designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

Note that the power-on notification includes displaying a power-on screen (image) on the image display device 31 indicating that the power has been turned on, or displaying a RAM clear notification from the audio output device 32 indicating that the main RAM 110c has been initialized. It means outputting sound.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S16, updates the random number value for jackpot determination. The initial random value, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random value for normal symbol determination are updated.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a power failure detection signal is input from a power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply board 140. If a power outage occurs, the process moves to step S18, and if a power outage does not occur, the process moves to step S15 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a disables timer interrupts in step S18, clears the output port in step S19, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S20, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S21 In step S22, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

Note that when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksum of all used areas of the main RAM 110c is calculated and compared, but all areas including unused areas are checked. The sum may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds), thereby executing the timer interrupt process described below.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves information stored in a register of the main CPU 110a to a stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, the process of updating the special symbol time counter, the process of updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, the process of updating the normal symbol time counter, the process of updating the opening/closing time of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. Processing to update (subtract 1) various timer counters is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, processing is performed to update the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for normal symbol determination, and the random number value for normal symbol variation. More specifically, each random value and random number counter are incremented by 1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0 and each random number is updated from the initial random number at that time. .

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process in step S130. Specifically, processing is performed to update (increase by 1) the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first big winning opening detection switch 16a, the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the second starting opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. It is determined whether there is an input to the various switches, and if there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data. The details will be described later using FIG. 15.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing in step S300. Specifically, processing is performed to control the jackpot lottery, the variable display of special symbols, the opening and closing of the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17, changes in the gaming state, and the like. The details will be described later using FIG. 18.

The main CPU 110a performs general electric power control processing in step S400. Specifically, the winning lottery, the variable display of normal symbols, the opening/closing of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. are controlled. The details will be described later using FIG. 25.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, with reference to each prize ball counter, a process is performed in which a command for specifying the number of payouts corresponding to various winning holes is generated and set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of balls to be put out is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and a process is performed to pay out the number of game balls from the payout device according to the command for specifying the number of balls to be put out.

The main CPU 110a performs game progress data creation processing in step S600. Specifically, the external information signal output from the game information output terminal board 30, the drive data of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, the driving data of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, and the driving data of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c. Drive data, display data of the first special symbol display device 20, display data of the second special symbol display device 21, display data of the normal symbol display device 22, display data of the first special symbol reservation display 23, second special symbol Processing is performed to create output data related to game progress, such as display data on the hold display 24 and display data on the normal symbol hold display 25.

Main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S700. Specifically, processing is performed to output the external information signal, various drive data, and various display data created in step S600. It also performs processing for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area and transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to the performance control board 120 and payout control board 130.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and when the detection signal is input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first big winning opening detection switch 16a or the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, and when the detection signal is input, the big winning opening detection switch 16a or the second big winning opening detection switch 17a is determined. A process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starting opening detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting opening, and the first special If the number of reserved symbols (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is added by 1, the special symbol determination information is acquired, and the special symbol determination information is stored in a predetermined storage section (first When stored in the storage unit to fourth storage unit), processing is performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 16.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port, and the second If the number of reserved special symbols (U2) is less than 4, the second number of reserved special symbols (U2) is added by 1, and the special symbol determination information is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage section (the first storage unit to fourth storage unit). The details will be described later using FIG. 17.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and when the detection signal is input, if the number of normal symbols held (G) is less than 4, the number of normal symbols held (G) is changed. At the same time as adding 1, processing is performed to acquire the ordinary figure determination information and store it in a predetermined storage section (first to fourth storage sections) of the ordinary figure determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter) for the first starting opening used for prize balls to update it.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-3. If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-4, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting opening Detection switch input processing ends.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores the result, and in step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores the result. The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to perform processing such as displaying the first reservation icon and the reservation number image on the image display device 31.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches the vacant memory sections in order from the first memory section in the first special figure determination information storage area, and searches the vacant memory sections. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S230-7. Specifically, with reference to the preliminary determination table for the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of special symbol display device, the random value for jackpot determination acquired this time, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the special symbol are determined. A process of determining a scheduled fluctuation pattern is performed based on the random number value for fluctuation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a starting opening winning designation command indicating the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S230-7 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, a starting hole winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 120, and before the variable display of special symbols triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 14 starts (1 or It becomes possible to perform a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of a jackpot game being executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols) (makes people expect the jackpot game to be executed).

Note that the effect of causing the starting port lamp 14b to emit light in a color corresponding to the light emitting color of the hold icon described above constitutes the pre-read effect. Therefore, the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b can also change colors in stages over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols. In the following, a pending icon whose color has been changed may be referred to as a "changed pending icon".

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the current second starting port detection switch input process ends.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting opening used for prize balls to update it.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being played. If the auxiliary game is not in progress, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the auxiliary game is in progress, in step S240-4, the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) is incremented by 1 and updated.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-5. If the second special symbol retention number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-6, and if the second special symbol retention number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second starting opening Detection switch input processing ends.

In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and stores it, and in step S240-7, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol retention number (U2) and stores it, and in step S240-7, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol retention number (U2) and stores it in the special symbol memory indicating the second special symbol retention number (U2). The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and it becomes possible to perform processing such as displaying the second pending icon on the image display device 31.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches the vacant memory sections in order from the first memory section in the second special figure determination information storage area, and searches the vacant memory sections. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S240-9. Specifically, with reference to the preliminary determination table for the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of special symbol display device, the random value for jackpot determination acquired this time, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the special symbol are determined. A process of determining a scheduled fluctuation pattern is performed based on the random number value for fluctuation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a starting opening prize designation command indicating the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S240-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, a starting hole winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 120, and before the variable display of special symbols triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 15 starts (1 or It becomes possible to perform a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of a jackpot game being executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols) (makes people expect the jackpot game to be executed). In addition, the look-ahead effect using the hold icon and the starting port lamp 14b can also be executed, for example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 15 in a high probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric line processing data, and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the process moves to the special symbol memory determination process (step S310), and the special figure special electric line processing data = 1 If so, the process is moved to special symbol fluctuation processing (step S320), if the special symbol tokuden processing data = 2, the processing is shifted to special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol tokuden processing data = 3, it is a jackpot. The process moves to the game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric line process data=4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

This "special figure special electric line processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric line control process as described later, so that the necessary subroutines are processed as appropriate as the game progresses. Become.

The main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing in step S310, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be fixed and displayed, a variation time determination process for determining a variation time of the special symbol, etc. are performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 19.

The main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing in step S320, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a process to move to the special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 21.

The main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process in step S330, and ends the current special symbol special electric control process. Specifically, in addition to performing processing corresponding to the special symbols (jackpot symbols, losing symbols) that have been confirmed and stopped, the number of time-saving games (J), the time-saving game flag, the number of high-probability games (X), and the high-probability game flag are executed. Perform the process to set the . The details will be described later using FIG. 22.

The main CPU 110a performs the jackpot game process in step S340, and ends the current special figure special electric control process. Specifically, processing for controlling the jackpot game is performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 23.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game end process and ends the current special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process is performed to determine either a high probability gaming state or a low probability gaming state, and also to determine a gaming state, either a time saving gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state. . The details will be described later using FIG. 24.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol is not in a variable display (special symbol time counter = 0), The process moves to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move. Note that affirming the process in step S310-2 corresponds to "establishment of starting conditions."

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) to update it, and moves the process to step S310-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, step S318- Move processing to step 1. Note that affirming the process in step S310-4 corresponds to "satisfaction of the starting condition."

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number (U1) to update it, and moves the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol determination stored in the special symbol determination information retention storage area corresponding to the special symbol retention number (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Shift information (storage area shift). Specifically, each special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections in the first special symbol determination information storage area or the second special symbol determination information storage area is stored in the previous memory. shift to the department. Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage section). At this time, the special symbol determination information used in the previous variable display of special symbols, which has already been written in the special symbol execution storage area (0th storage section), is erased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is given priority over the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and is subtracted, but the first special symbol The number of reserved symbols (U1) and the number of second special symbols reserved (U2) may be subtracted, or the first number of reserved special symbols (U1) may be subtracted with priority over the number of second special symbols reserved (U2). You may also do so.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a displays a special symbol indicating the first special symbol retention number (U1) or the second special symbol retention number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. A symbol storage designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the number of the first pending icon or the second pending icon displayed on the image display device 31 is reduced, or the first pending icon or Processing such as changing the second pending icon to the variable icon will be performed.

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. (Special figure data) is determined. The details will be described later using FIG. 20.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting opening), jackpot lottery result, special symbol, number of special symbols reserved (U), special symbol execution A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation stored in the storage area.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, a variation pattern designation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 performs processing to execute a variation production according to the variation pattern in order to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. .

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state at the start of the variation, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state on the production control board 120.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 above in the special symbol time counter. Note that the special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 ms in S110.

The main CPU 110a starts variable display of special symbols in step S316. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. As a result, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating that the player is in a customer waiting state (standby state) in which a variable display of special symbols or a jackpot game is not being executed. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process moves to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is waiting in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S318-3, sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is waiting. The designated command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs processing for executing the customer waiting performance.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot in step S311-1. Specifically, when the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a) Referring to the jackpot judgment table, if the special figure judgment information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area, the jackpot shown in FIG. 5(b) is determined. Referring to the lottery jackpot determination table, it is determined whether or not it is a "jackpot" based on the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-2, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-5.

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot symbol determination processing in step S311-2. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 6(b), the jackpot special symbol to be fixed and stopped is determined based on the random value for special symbol determination stored in the special symbol execution storage area. The type is determined, and stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined type of jackpot special symbol is set in the stop special symbol data storage area.

The stop special symbol data set in the stop special symbol data storage area is used to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot symbol" in the special symbol stop process in FIG. 22, which will be described later, and also in the jackpot game process in FIG. 23. It is also used to determine the operating mode of the big winning opening, and is also used to determine the gaming state after the jackpot ends in the jackpot game ending process of FIG.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets a jackpot performance symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special symbol data determined in step S311-2 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the production design designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type of jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is confirmed and stopped displayed on the production control board 120.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot from the information set in the gaming state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area), and determines the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Game state information indicating the game state is set in the game state buffer. Specifically, if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, 01H is set. If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

In this way, we decided to set the gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot in the gaming state buffer, in addition to the gaming state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area). Since the high-probability game flag and time-saving game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) will be reset, after the jackpot ends, a new one will be created based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. This is because the gaming state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, by providing a gaming state buffer separate from the gaming state storage area to store gaming information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, by referring to the gaming information in the gaming state buffer after the jackpot has been won, Based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a new gaming state after the end of the jackpot (time-saving gaming state, number of time-saving gaming, etc.) can be set.

The main CPU 110a performs losing symbol determination processing in step S311-5. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol determination table for losing as shown in FIG. The type is determined, and stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined type of losing special symbol is set in the stop special symbol data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets a losing performance symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special symbol data determined in step S311-5 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and The jackpot determination process ends. As a result, the production symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type of loss special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is fixed and displayed on the production control board 120.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the variable time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed. If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process is ended, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a causes the variable display of the special symbol to be fixed and stopped. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbols set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 are displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol. Stop display data for displaying a confirmed stop on the display device 21 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol is fixed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been fixed and stopped displayed in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a symbol confirmation command is sent to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 performs processing to end the variable production.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for displaying the special symbol to be fixed and stopped in the special symbol time counter. In addition, the special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 2, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 23, and ends the current special symbol variation processing.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). If the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game end determination process in step S330-2. Specifically, when the time-saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving games (J) and updated, and it is determined whether the new number of time-saving games (J) is "0" or not. Determine whether As a result, if the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared and the process moves to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time-saving game flag is not set or if the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0", the process directly advances to step S330-3.

The main CPU 110a performs a high probability game end determination process in step S330-3. Specifically, when the high probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the high probability game count (X) and updated, and the new high probability game count (X) is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not. As a result, if the high probability game count (X) is "0", the high probability game flag is cleared and the process moves to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high probability game flag is not set or if the number of high probability games (X) is not "0", the process directly advances to step S330-4.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state on the production control board 120.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop special pattern data stored in the stop special pattern data storage area is a jackpot symbol. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 19, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 3 and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs normal game state transition processing in step S330-8. Specifically, the high probability game flag, the number of high probability games (X), the time saving game flag, and the number of time saving games (J) are cleared to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non time saving gaming state).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot start preparation setting processing in step S330-9. Specifically, with reference to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, the type of jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot is determined as shown in FIG. From the table group, a jackpot opening mode determining table (``first jackpot TBL'', "second jackpot TBL", and "third jackpot TBL") corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game in the special game timer counter, and ends the current special symbol stop processing. Specifically, the opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined from the jackpot opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 and set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing jackpot game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area to 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S340-4. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of openings (K), energization data is set for energizing the first big prize opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening/closing solenoid 17c, and the above-mentioned With reference to the big winning hole opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, the first big winning hole 16 is determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of openings (K). , or set the opening time of the second grand prize opening 17 in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 will be opened.

The main CPU 110a performs round designation command transmission determination processing in step S340-5. Specifically, when the number of openings (K) is "1", that is, when a round game is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is stored in the performance transmission data in the main RAM 110c. Set to area. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs processing for executing the round performance of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is a period after all preset round games are completed. If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S340-18, and if the ending is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the grand prize opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big prize opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening/closing solenoid 17c is set. If the big winning opening is being closed, the process moves to step S340-8, and if the big winning opening is not being closed, the process moves to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time of the grand prize opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is ended, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-4 to open the jackpot opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 balls) or the opening time per round in the number of openings (K) has elapsed. Determine whether it is established. If it is determined that the opening termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the opening termination condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S340-10. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is cleared, and the opening mode of the grand prize opening determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the closing time of the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 ( Set the closing interval time (or one closing time) in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 will be closed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether one round has ended in step S340-11. Specifically, whether either the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 balls) or the number of openings (K) reaches the maximum number of openings is established. Determine whether If one round has ended, the process moves to step S340-12, and if one round has not ended, the current jackpot game process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of openings (K) and the big winning hole winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of round games (R) has reached the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores it, and ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R), and in step S340-16, based on the grand prize opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 above. , the type of special game (long winning game, short winning game, advanced winning game) is determined, and an ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs processing for executing the ending performance of the jackpot game.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big prize opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-19, and if the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 4, prepares to move the process to the jackpot game ending process shown in FIG. 24, and ends the current jackpot game process.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing in step S350-2. Specifically, with reference to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability gaming state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. When it is determined whether the game is in the high probability game state and the game state is to be shifted to the high probability game state, a high probability game flag indicating the high probability game state is set in the high probability game flag storage area. For example, if the stop special symbol data is "01", a high probability game flag is set.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing in step S350-3. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, it is the number of variable displays that can be executed in a high probability gaming state based on the loaded stop special figure data and gaming state information. The number of high probability games (X) is determined, and the determined number of high probability games (X) is set in the high probability game number (X) storage area.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game flag setting processing in step S350-4. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, it is determined whether or not to shift to the time-saving gaming state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded stop special figure data and game information. When determining and shifting to the time-saving game state, a time-saving game flag indicating the time-saving game state is set in the time-saving game flag storage area.

The main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game count determination process in step S350-5. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and gaming state information, the time saving which is the number of variable displays that can be executed in the time saving gaming state is determined. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the storage area for the number of time-saving games (J).

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a identifies the gaming state by checking the presence or absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, and sends a gaming state designation command indicating the specified gaming state to the effect transmission data storage area. set. Thereby, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and it becomes possible for the production control board 120 to grasp the gaming state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 19, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(General control board control process)
Referring to FIG. 25, the general electric power control process of the main control board 110 will be explained. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating the general electric power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the general pattern and general electricity processing data, and if the general pattern and general electricity processing data = 0, the process is moved to the normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S410), and the general pattern and general electricity processing data If =1, the process moves to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

As described later, this "universal and general electric power processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the general and general electric power control processing, so that the necessary subroutines are processed as appropriate as the game progresses. It turns out.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol variation processing in step S410, and ends the current general pattern and general electricity control processing. Specifically, a hit determination process, a process of displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, a process of stopping and displaying the normal symbols, etc. are performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 26.

The main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game process in step S420, and ends the current general figure general electric power control process. Specifically, processing for controlling the auxiliary game is performed. The details will be described later using FIG. 27.

(Normal pattern variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. If the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S410-9, and if the normal symbols are not in the variable display mode, the process moves to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of normal symbols reserved (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbols held (G) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbols held (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved symbols (G) to update it, and moves the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol retention storage area. Specifically, each piece of normal figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage section is shifted to the normal pattern execution storage area (0th storage section). At this time, the special symbol determination information used in the previous fluctuating display of the regular symbol, which has already been written in the regular symbol execution storage area (0th storage section), is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, with reference to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a), it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the gaming state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the normal pattern execution storage area. .

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, with reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(b), the stop display is performed based on the current time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for determining the regular symbol. The normal symbol (stopped common symbol data) to be played is determined, the determined stopped common symbol data is set in the stopped common symbol data storage area, and the common symbol designation command corresponding to the stopped common symbol data is stored in the performance transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set to area. As a result, the normal pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can grasp the stopped general pattern data.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in step S410-7. Specifically, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The symbol fluctuation time is determined and set in the normal symbol time counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol fluctuation designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can grasp the variation time of the normal symbol.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts displaying the normal symbol variation, and ends the current normal symbol variation processing. Specifically, the variable display data of normal symbols is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variably displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the variable time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is ended, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S410-10.

The main CPU 110a stops the fluctuating display of the normal symbols in step S410-10. Specifically, the fluctuation display data set in step S410-8 above is cleared, and the stop display data for causing the normal symbol set in step S410-6 to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22 is cleared as main. Set it in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the winning determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped normal pattern data set in the stopped normal pattern data storage area is a winning normal symbol. If it is a winning normal symbol, the process moves to step S410-12, and if it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the general figure/general electric processing data=1 to prepare to move the process to the auxiliary game process shown in FIG. 27, and in step S410-13, performs the opening mode determination process. Specifically, with reference to the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determine the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game to the auxiliary game timer counter, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. In addition, the auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Main control board auxiliary game processing)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being opened. If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S420-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to S420-4.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary game process is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S420-3.

The main CPU 110a performs the second starting port opening process in step S420-3, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of openings (S), energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set, and the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of openings (S) is set. Set the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter. This opens the second starting port 15.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If ending is in progress, the process moves to step S420-12, and if not in ending, process moves to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second starting port 15 is being closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c has been set. If the second starting port 15 is being closed, the process moves to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not being closed, the process moves to step S420-7.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary process is ended, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S420-3 in order to open the second starting port 15.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) reaches the specified number (10 balls), or the opening time per round in the number of openings (S) elapses. It is determined whether or not the following holds true. If it is determined that the opening termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening termination condition is not satisfied, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a second starting port closing process in step S420-8. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second starting port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. This causes the second starting port 15 to close.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends in step S420-9. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of openings (S) of the second starting port has reached the maximum number of openings. If the auxiliary game is to be ended, the process moves to step S420-10, and if the auxiliary game is not to be ended, the current auxiliary game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing in step S420-10. Specifically, the number of openings (S) and the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 above in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process moves to step S420-13, and if the ending time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary game process ends.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the normal symbol general processing data, prepares to move the processing to the normal symbol fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 26, and ends the current auxiliary game processing.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The processing executed by the sub CPU 120a in the production control unit 120m will be explained. First, the main processing of the production control section 120m will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the production control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing in step S1000. In this process, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b, and also initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a performs sub random number update processing in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 120m will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section 120m. Although not shown, a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 120m generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (2 milliseconds), reads the timer interrupt processing program, and outputs the production control board. The timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of sub CPU 120a to the stack area.

In step S1400, sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis process will be described later using FIGS. 30 and 31.

In addition, when the production control unit 120m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) of the production control unit 120m occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing to update various timer counters used in the production control section 120m.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the signals from the production button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b are input, and if the signals from the production button detection switch 35a, etc. Performance input control processing is performed to transmit a performance button signal and the like to the audio control unit 150.

In step S1800, sub CPU 120a performs data output processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 120c to lamp/drive control section 160 and display/audio control section 150.

In step S1900, sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
Next, the command analysis process of the production control section 120m will be explained using FIG. 30 and FIG. 31. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing (1) in the production control section 120m, and FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing (2) in the production control section 120m. Command analysis processing (2) is performed following command analysis processing (1).

In step S1401, the sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step S1402, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step S1403, and if it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step S1404.

The sub CPU 120a performs pending memory update processing in step S1403, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, processing is performed such as analyzing the number of pending memories from the received special symbol storage designation command and setting the analyzed number of pending memories in the pending memory number counter of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting opening prize designation command. If it is a starting opening winning designation command, the process moves to step S1405, and if it is not a starting opening winning designation command, the process moves to step S1406.

The sub CPU 120a performs icon change effect determination processing in step S1405, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received starting opening winning designation command, processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario.

Note that the icon change effect corresponds to the effect using the above-mentioned hold icon and the starting gate lamp 14b.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect design designation command. If it is a performance symbol designation command, the process moves to step S1407, and if it is not a performance design designation command, the process moves to step S1408.

The sub CPU 120a performs basic symbol data determination processing in step S1407, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the content of the received effect design designation command, the basic symbol data (1st to 3rd jackpot symbol data, loss symbol data) that makes it possible to identify the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot are determined. Perform processing.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a fluctuation pattern designation command, the process moves to step S1409, and if it is not a fluctuation pattern designation command, the process moves to step S1412.

The sub CPU 120a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step S1409. Specifically, based on the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of variation production executed using various production devices, is determined, and a variation production pattern is determined according to the determined variation production pattern. Processing is performed to set the variable effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. Note that details of this variable effect pattern determination process will be described later using FIG. 32.

The sub CPU 120a performs icon display mode update processing in step S1410. Specifically, the pending icon displayed on the image display device 31 and the display mode of the variable icon are updated based on the change scenario determined in the above-described icon change effect determination process and the determined variable effect pattern. and performs processing to execute the icon change effect.

The sub CPU 120a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step S1411. Specifically, based on the determined variable performance pattern, processing is performed to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot preview performance, the type of jackpot preview performance to be executed, and the like. Details of this jackpot preview effect determination process will be described later using FIG. 34.

In addition, a jackpot preview performance is a performance that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed as a result of a fluctuating performance that is being executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), or a result of a jackpot determination. The performance suggests that.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process moves to step S1413, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step S1414.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 120a performs a production pattern determination stop process, and ends the current command analysis process. Specifically, in order to display the performance symbols 38 in a fixed and stopped manner, a process is performed in which a stop designation command for displaying the production symbols in a fixed and stopped state is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, a stop designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 150 and the lamp/drive control section 160, and processing for displaying the variable effect as a fixed stop is performed.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step S1415, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step S1416.

The sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process in step S1415, and ends the current command analysis process. Specifically, the current gaming state is specified with reference to the received gaming state specifying command, and data indicating the specified gaming state is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If it is an opening designation command, the process moves to step S1417, and if it is not an opening designation command, the process moves to step S1418.

The sub CPU 120a performs opening performance pattern determination processing in step S1417, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, a performance pattern of the opening performance performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and an opening performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. conduct. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process moves to step S1419, and if there is no round designation command, the process moves to step S1420.

The sub CPU 120a performs round effect pattern determination processing in step S1419, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the round designation command, a performance pattern of a round performance performed during a round game is determined, and a process is performed in which a round performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. . As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If it is an ending designation command, the process moves to step S1421, and if it is not an ending designation command, the process moves to step S1422.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs jackpot end effect pattern determination processing, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, a performance pattern of the ending performance performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and an ending designation command corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. . As a result, the ending effect designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S1422, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is a customer waiting state designation command, the process moves to step S1423, and if it is not a customer waiting state designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The sub CPU 120a performs customer waiting effect determination processing in step S1423, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting performance to be performed during the customer waiting state (customer waiting period) is determined, and a customer waiting performance designation command corresponding to the determined customer waiting performance is transmitted to the sub-RAM 120c. Performs processing to set it in the buffer. As a result, a customer waiting effect designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the customer waiting effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination process)
Next, the variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 120m will be explained using FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 120m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1441-1, and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 33) in step S1441-2.

In step S1441-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variable effect pattern determination table and determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). . Details of this variable effect pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 33.

In step S1441-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a variable effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 150 and the lamp/drive control section 160, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variable effect pattern. The variable performance pattern determination table associates the variable performance pattern designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each variable performance pattern, and the variable performance pattern to be determined, and the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is shown as a reference. is listed.

The variation effect pattern is a variation performed using the effect devices of the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the effect button 35, and the cross button 36. This is the performance mode of the performance, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-continuous notice, the presence or absence of a reach performance, the content of the reach performance, etc. are defined.

Here, each term described in the performance structure of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 will be explained.

“Normal fluctuation” indicates that a normal fluctuation performance is performed in which no ready-to-win state is formed by the performance symbol 38.
The term "shortening variation" indicates that a shortening variation performance is performed in which the variation time is shorter than that of the normal variation performance and no reach state is formed by the performance symbol 38.
"Normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect is performed in which a reach state is formed by the effect pattern 38.
"SP reach" indicates that a reach state is formed by the performance symbol 38, and an SP reach effect with higher jackpot expectation than normal reach effect is performed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that a reach state is formed by the performance symbols 38, and an SPSP reach effect is performed which has a higher jackpot expectation than the SP reach effect.

"Symbol inciting failure" indicates that, although the inciting effect is executed to determine whether or not a ready-to-reach state is formed using the left and right effect symbols 38, the result is that no ready-to-reach state is formed in the end.
``Successful inciting the symbol'' indicates that the effect of inciting whether or not a ready-to-win state is formed by the left and right presentation symbols 38 is executed, and the result is that a ready-to-win state is finally formed.

"Pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that, although an inciting effect as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed is executed, the result is that the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed in the end.
"Pseudo-continuous success" indicates that an inciting effect as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed is executed, and the result is that the pseudo-continuous notice is finally executed.
"Pseudo-continuous success after reach" indicates that a pseudo-continuous notice is executed after a reach state is formed.

"Button non-hit" means that an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 35 is executed in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding reach performance, and in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 35 is operated or the performance button 35 is pressed. When the validity period has elapsed, a win/loss notification performance is executed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but during the validity period of this operation promotion performance, the performance button 35 does not move upward and remains in a non-protruding state (normal state). It shows that it will be done.
"Button thrust" means that an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 35 is executed in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding reach performance, and in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 35 is operated or the performance button 35 is activated. When the period has elapsed, a win/loss notification effect is executed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but during the valid period of this operation promotion effect, the effect button 35 moves upward and becomes a protruding state (special state). ing.

In the present embodiment, for example, the production button 35 is provided as an operation device that the player operates in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win production, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, other operating means may be provided in addition to the effect button 35. Specifically, a production lever may be provided.
The production lever may be provided integrally with the production button 35, or may be provided separately.
In addition, when a production lever is provided, in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win production in the case of a jackpot, it may be made easier to select a production that causes the production lever to be operated rather than the production button 35.
That is, "button not pressed" may be read as "effect button 35", and "button pressed" may be read as "effect lever", respectively.

"Resurrection effect" means that once a loss is notified in the final phase (late stage) of SP Reach or SPSP Reach, and then, during the temporary stop display period before the final stop display, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b is actuated to notify you of a jackpot in reverse.

The "specific image" is an image that is displayed on the image display device 31 after notifying a loss in SP reach or higher, and is particularly used to perform SP reach or SPSP reach from the background image on which SP reach or SPSP reach was performed. This is an image displayed on the image display device 31 when switching to the previous background image.
In addition, the "specific image" is always displayed if it is equal to or higher than the SP reach of the loss, and in the case of a jackpot, it will be displayed if it is a variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 30) that performs a "resurrection performance". It is now possible to do so.
That is, the "specific image" has a characteristic that a variable effect pattern of SP reach or higher for a loss is more likely to be displayed than a variable effect pattern of SP reach or higher for a jackpot.
A display example of the "specific image" will be described in detail later using an animation diagram.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The higher the number of executions, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed or the number of times the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the button 35 is in a special state. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations as to whether or not the effect button 35 will enter the special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that when the production button 35 is in the normal state, a "first operation promotion image" is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the production button 35 (for example, the "first operation promotion image" in FIG. If the production button 35 is in a special state, a "second operation promotion image" is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation promotion image that prompts the production button 35 to be operated (for example, (See “Second operation promotion image” in FIG. 62).

(Jackpot preview production decision process)
Next, the jackpot preview effect determination process of the effect control section 120m will be explained using FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 120m.

First, in step S1443-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variable effect pattern, and in step S1443-2, uses the pre-reach advance notice determination table (see FIG. 35) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect. A notice pattern is determined in which the type of pre-reach notice performance to be executed is determined. Details of this pre-reach notice determination table will be described later using FIG. 35.

In step S1443-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a dialogue notice performance. If the preview pattern is to execute a dialogue preview performance, the process moves to step S1443-4, and if the preview pattern does not execute a dialogue preview performance, the process moves to step S1443-6.

Note that the dialogue preview performance is a jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue indicating the expectation level of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device 31 based on the operation of the performance button 35, and a sound corresponding to the dialogue is output from the audio output device 32. It is one of the types.

In step S1443-4, the sub CPU 120a uses the line pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(a)) to determine a line pattern, which is a performance mode of the line preview performance, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 36(a).

In step S1443-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a dialogue preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a dialogue preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the dialogue preview performance is performed.

In step S1443-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect (SU notice effect). If it is a notice pattern that executes a step-up notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-7, and if it is not a notice pattern that executes a step-up notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-9.

In addition, the step-up preview performance is a predetermined progression from the first step to any of the multiple steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage), depending on the jackpot expectation level. This is a type of jackpot preview performance that executes step performances in sequence. Specifically, more step performances are more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation level is high) than when a jackpot game is not executed.

In step S1443-7, the sub CPU 120a uses the step-up pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(b)) to determine the step-up pattern that is the performance mode of the step-up notice performance, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. set. Details of this step-up pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 36(b).

In step S1443-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a step-up preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined step-up pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, a step-up preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the step-up preview performance is performed.

In step S1443-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a roulette notice effect. If the preview pattern is to execute a roulette preview effect, the process moves to step S1443-10, and if it is not a preview pattern to execute a roulette preview effect, the process moves to step S1443-12.

In addition, the roulette preview effect is to display multiple selection icons, rotate the cursor image on the multiple selection icons, and after a predetermined period of time, stop the cursor image on any one of the selection icons ( This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which the player selects one of the selection icons and executes the performance indicated by the selected selection icon. For example, if the selection icon "SP" is selected, "SP reach" will be executed. In addition, for example, it is easier to select the selection icons ``hot'' or ``rainbow'' when a jackpot game is executed (higher jackpot expectation) than when a jackpot game is not executed. .

In step S1443-10, the sub CPU 120a uses the roulette pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(c)) to determine the roulette pattern and selection icon, which are the performance modes of the roulette preview performance, and stores them in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. Set to . Details of this roulette pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 37(c).

In step S1443-11, the sub CPU 120a sets a roulette preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined roulette pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a roulette preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the roulette preview performance is performed.

In step S1443-12, the sub CPU 120a uses the in-reach notice determination table (see FIG. 38(a)) to create a notice pattern in which the presence or absence of the in-reach notice performance and the type of the in-reach notice performance to be executed are determined. Determine. Details of this in-reach notice determination table will be described later using FIG. 38(a).

In step S1443-13, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a character group notice effect. If the preview pattern is to execute a character group preview effect, the process moves to step S1443-14, and if the preview pattern does not execute a character group preview effect, the process moves to step S1443-16.

Note that the character group preview performance is a type of jackpot preview performance in which one of a plurality of types of characters with different jackpot expectation levels is displayed on the image display device 31 as a group.

In step S1443-14, the sub CPU 120a uses the character group pattern determination table (see FIG. 38(b)) to determine a character group pattern, which is the production mode of the character group preview production, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. Details of this character group pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 38(b).

In step S1443-15, the sub CPU 120a sets a character group preview performance designation command corresponding to the determined character group pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a character group preview performance designation command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 150 and lamp/drive control unit 160, and the character group preview performance is executed.

In step S1443-16, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a decorative member notice effect. If the preview pattern is to execute a decorative member preview performance, the process moves to step S1443-17, and if it is not a preview pattern to execute a decorative member preview performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

Note that the decorative member advance notice performance is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are operated from the initial position to the operating position. Specifically, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b move from the initial position to the operating position when a jackpot game is executed (higher jackpot expectation) than when a jackpot game is not executed. The number of times you do this is likely to increase.

In step S1443-17, the sub CPU 120a determines the number of operations of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b in the decorative member advance presentation using the decorative member operation frequency determination table (see FIG. 38(c)). and set it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the decorative member operation count determination table will be described later using FIG. 38(c).

In step S1443-18, the sub CPU 120a sets a decorative member preview designation command corresponding to the determined number of operations into the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current jackpot preview effect determination process.

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach notice. The pre-reach notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be determined.

The preview patterns for the pre-reach notice include "No notice" where the pre-reach notice is not executed, "Speech preview performance" where the dialogue preview performance is executed, "Step up notice performance" where the step up notice performance is executed, and Roulette notice. There are four types of ``Roulette Preview Performances'' in which the effects are performed, and the expected jackpot performance is: No Preview <Speech Preview Performance<Roulette Preview Performance<Step-up Preview Performance.

The characteristics of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 35 are that the pre-reach notice is more likely to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss, and the fluctuating presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation is The point is that the pre-reach notice is more likely to be executed when a variable production pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot has been determined than when it has been determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the pre-reach notice shown in FIG. 35 is merely an example, and a pre-reach notice that is not shown may also be provided.

(Serif pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The line pattern determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each line pattern, and the line pattern to be determined.

The line patterns include "normal lines" where it is unclear whether or not there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed, "reach confirmed lines" where it is certain that a reach effect will be executed, and a line where it is certain that a reach effect will be executed. Four categories have been set: ``Expectation Level UP Lines'' that indicate that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed, and ``Preliminary Lines (Premier)'' that are certain to be a jackpot game. Multiple lines are set, and the jackpot expectation level is normal lines < guaranteed reach lines < expected level UP lines < guaranteed lines (jackpot guaranteed).

As a feature of the line pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(a), when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when the jackpot lottery result is a loss, lines with a reach confirmation line or higher (reach confirmation line, expectation level UP line, win probability line, When a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is determined than when a variable production pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is determined, it is easier to determine a dialogue with a guaranteed reach or higher than a variable production pattern with a low expectation of a jackpot. Confirmed lines, Expectation UP lines, and Guaranteed lines) are easy to determine. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Step-up pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(b) is a diagram showing a step-up pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a step-up pattern. The step-up pattern determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each step-up pattern, and the determined step-up pattern.

The step-up patterns include "Normal SU1" in which the first step effect is executed, "Normal SU2" in which the first and second step effects are executed, and "Normal SU1" in which the first to third step effects are executed. ``SU3'', ``Normal SU4'' where the 1st to 4th step effects are executed, ``Normal SU5'' where the 1st to 5th step effects are executed, and a jackpot game where the 1st to 5th step effects are executed. Six types of "probable SU5 (premier)" that are guaranteed to be executed are set, and the jackpot expectation level is normal SU1<normal SU2<normal SU3<normal SU4<normal SU5<probable SU5.

As a feature of the step-up pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(b), when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss, a step-up pattern with a large number of executions of step effects is more likely to be determined, and a jackpot lottery result is easier to determine. The point is that a step-up pattern with a large number of executions of step effects is more likely to be determined when a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of jackpot is determined than when a variable effect pattern with a low expectation level is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Roulette pattern determination table)
FIG. 37(c) is a diagram showing a roulette pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a roulette pattern and selection icon. The roulette pattern determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the allocation ratio (%) for each roulette pattern, the determined roulette pattern, and the selection icon.

The roulette patterns include "Roulette pattern 1" whose selection icons are "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow"; Two types of roulette patterns are set, ``roulette pattern 2'' consisting of ``hot heat'' and ``rainbow,'' and the expected jackpot is roulette pattern 1 < roulette pattern 2.

The characteristics of the roulette pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(c) are that roulette pattern 2 is more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss, and the variable production pattern with low jackpot expectation is One point is that selection icons such as "hot" and "rainbow" are more likely to be selected when a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot has been determined than when it has been determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Reach notice determination table)
FIG. 38(a) is a diagram showing a ready-to-reach notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach notice. The in-reach notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be determined.

The notice patterns for the in-reach notice include "No notice" in which the in-reach notice is not executed, "Character group notice effect" in which the character group notice effect is executed, and "Decorative member notice effect" in which the decorative member notice effect is executed. There are three types, and the expected jackpot is as follows: no advance notice <decoration member advance notice <character group advance notice.

The characteristics of the in-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 38(a) are that the in-reach notice (character group notice performance) is more likely to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss; The point is that the in-reach preview (character group preview performance) is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low jackpot expectation is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the in-reach notice shown in FIG. 38 is merely an example, and the in-reach notice shown in FIG. 38 may also be provided.

(Character group pattern determination table)
FIG. 38(b) is a diagram showing a character group pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a character group pattern. The character group pattern determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each character group pattern, and the determined character group pattern.

The character group pattern includes a "first character group" where the first character group is displayed, a "second character group" where the second character group is displayed, and a "third character group" where the third character group is displayed. There are four types of "4th character group (premier)" where the 4th character group is displayed and a jackpot is guaranteed, and the jackpot expectation level is 1st character group < 2nd character group < 3rd character group < 4th character group (jackpot guaranteed).

A feature of the character group pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38(b) is that it is determined that a variable performance pattern equal to or higher than the SP reach performance will be executed at the time the character group preview performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the character group preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Decoration member operation number determination table)
FIG. 38(c) is a diagram showing a decorative member operation number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of times to operate the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b. The decorative member operation count determination table is associated with the operation count for each variable performance pattern.
For example, a variable performance pattern that ultimately executes an SP reach effect is associated with "1" as the number of operations, and a variable effect pattern that ultimately executes an SPSP reach effect is associated with a number of operations of "1". ” or “2”, and “3” is associated with the variable performance pattern that finally executes the full rotation reach performance as the number of operations.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the SPSP reach performance is finally executed, the number of operations "1" is more likely to be selected when the player loses, and the number of operations "2" is easier to select when the player wins the jackpot.
In other words, the jackpot expectation is as follows: 1 action < 2 actions < 3 actions (big hit confirmed).

As a feature of the decorative member operation number determination table shown in FIG. 38(c), for example, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b operate once at the start of variation or during normal reach, the effect is greater than the SP reach effect. An example of this is that it is confirmed that the variable performance pattern will be executed. Further, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b operate three times, a jackpot is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the decorative member preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 151)
The main processing of the overall control unit 151 will be explained using FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 151.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the central CPU 152, and the central CPU 152 performs the following main processing.

First, the supervising CPU 152 sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. In this process, the overall CPU 152 reads the main processing program from the overall ROM 153, initializes flags, etc. stored in the overall RAM 154, and performs processing such as initialization.

In step T3, the supervising CPU 152 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 154 to determine whether or not a production instruction command has been received from the production control unit 120m. If it has not been received (step T4: No), the process moves to step T7, and if it has been received (step T4: Yes), in step T5, the process corresponds to the received production instruction command. Animation pattern setting processing is performed to determine and set an animation pattern from each type of animation group. Note that details will be described later using FIG. 41.

Note that the performance instruction commands include a customer waiting performance command, an icon display command, a changing performance command, a variable performance pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening performance pattern command, a round performance pattern command, an ending performance pattern command, etc.

An animation group also includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns whose information specifies (specifies) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 38, an icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon or the relevant variable icon, and a variation production animation such as a background or character. Examples include a variable presentation group for displaying animations such as previews, a preview presentation group for displaying animations for special game presentations, and a special game presentation group for displaying animations for special game presentations.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 152 performs a sound setting process to determine and set a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command, and in step T7, updates the production image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is frame update timing (to draw a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag (step T7: No), the process goes to step T4. If there is a frame switching flag (step T7: Yes), the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 152 performs a display list generation/output process of generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 155.

Here, the display list is image shaping information for forming a performance image to be displayed on the image display device 31, and is generated for each frame or multiple units (frame update timing). In this embodiment, a display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process described later, drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. Note that the drawing control commands are set in order from the anime pattern of the lowest priority anime group to the anime pattern of the highest priority anime group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 152 performs drawing command processing to instruct the image control unit 155 to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 155 draws the effect image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and causes the image display device 31 to display the effect image that has been drawn on the display frame buffer. I do.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 152 generates a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, and performs a sound list generation/output process of outputting the generated sound list to the audio control unit 158.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 32, and is used when outputting new sounds. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 152 performs a sound output command process to instruct the audio control unit 158 to output a sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the audio control unit 158 causes the audio output device 32 to output a sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 32 in synchronization with the frame update timing by the image control unit 155, and output from the audio output device 32 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing by the image control unit 155. The output from 32 is terminated.

Note that although the audio output device 32 starts outputting various sounds in synchronization with the frame update timing, the audio output device 32 starts outputting various sounds so as not to synchronize with the frame update timing. may be stopped, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 152 performs animation control processing to update animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. Thereafter, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of overall control unit 151)
The command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151 will be explained using FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(a) is a flowchart showing the command reception interruption process of the overall control unit 151, and the command reception interruption process is executed by receiving the performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 120m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 152 performs a command reception process to receive the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 120m. Specifically, processing is performed to store the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 120m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 154. When this process is finished, the current command reception interrupt process is finished.

(V blank interrupt processing of overall control unit 151)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151 will be explained using FIG. 40(b). FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151. This is executed every time a V blank signal is received (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms), which is transmitted every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the supervising CPU 152 performs a counter update process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, updates the image control unit 155. In response, frame buffer switching command processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 157.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 seconds (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are converted into a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will alternate between.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 152 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Animation pattern setting process of general control unit 151)
Animation pattern setting processing by the overall control unit 151 will be explained using FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the animation pattern setting process of the overall control unit 151.

First, in step T5-1, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a customer waiting performance command, and if it is not a customer waiting performance command (step T5-1: No), step T5 The process moves to -3, and if it is a customer waiting production command (step T5-1: Yes), a customer waiting animation pattern is selected from the customer waiting group for displaying the customer waiting animation in step T5-2. Performs customer waiting animation pattern setting processing to be determined and set.

In step T5-3, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received production instruction command is an icon display pattern command, and if it is not an icon display pattern command (step T5-3: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-5. If the command is an icon display pattern command (step T5-3: Yes), in step T5-4, an icon animation pattern is extracted from the icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon or the animation of the variable icon. Perform the icon animation pattern setting process to determine and set the icon.

In step T5-5, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a variable performance pattern command, and if it is not a variable performance pattern command (step T5-5: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-7. If the command is a variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: Yes), a variable effect animation pattern is selected from the variable effect group for displaying background animation and character animation in step T5-6. Performs variable effect animation pattern setting processing to be determined and set.

In step T5-7, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received production instruction command is a symbol stop pattern command, and if it is not a symbol stop pattern command (step T5-7: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-9. If it is a symbol stop pattern command (step T5-7: Yes), in step T5-8, a symbol animation is selected from the production symbol group for displaying the animation of the production symbol or the animation of the fourth symbol. A design animation pattern setting process is performed to determine and set a pattern.

In step T5-9, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a preview performance pattern command, and if it is not a preview performance pattern command (step T5-9: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-11. If the command is a preview performance pattern command (step T5-9: Yes), then in step T5-10, a preview performance group for displaying a preview performance foreshadowing a possibility of a jackpot is executed. A preview performance animation pattern setting process is performed to determine and set a preview performance animation pattern from the following.

In step T5-11, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an operation promotion pattern command, and if it is not an operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-13. If the command is an operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: Yes), in step T5-12, an operation promotion pattern command is sent from the operation promotion group for displaying an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35. An operation promotion animation pattern setting process is performed to determine and set an animation pattern.

In step T5-13, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an operation performance pattern command, and if it is not an operation performance pattern command (step T5-13: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-15. If the command is an operation effect pattern command (step T5-13: Yes), in step T5-14, an operation effect animation pattern is determined and set from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect. Performs operation effect animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-15, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is an opening performance pattern command, and if it is not an opening performance pattern command (step T5-15: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-17. If the command is an opening performance pattern command (step T5-15: Yes), an opening performance animation pattern is determined and set from the opening performance group for displaying the opening performance in step T5-16. Performs opening animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-17, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received performance instruction command is a round performance pattern command, and if it is not a round performance pattern command (step T5-17: No), the control CPU 152 executes step T5-19. If the command is a round effect pattern command (step T5-17: Yes), in step T5-18, a round effect animation pattern is determined and set from the round effect group for displaying the round effect. Performs round production animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-19, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether the received production instruction command is an ending production pattern command, and if it is not an ending production pattern command (step T5-19: No), the current animation pattern When the setting process is completed and it is an ending effect pattern command (step T5-19: Yes), in step T5-20, an ending effect animation pattern is determined and set from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect. The ending effect animation pattern determination process is performed, and the current animation pattern setting process is ended.

Next, the first characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 42 to 46.

FIG. 42 is a time chart 1 showing details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), in which (a) shows details of variable effect pattern 1, and (b) shows details of variable effect pattern 5. (c) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7.

In FIG. 42, the "performance pattern (performance pattern 38)", "small performance pattern (small performance pattern 38d)", "reservation design (the above-mentioned reservation number image)", and "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 are shown in FIG. (Specific image 31e to be described later)" details for each variation effect pattern are shown.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the fluctuation effect pattern 1, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the "performance symbols" are scrolled in the vertical direction, and the player can visually recognize the scrolling display.
Further, at this time, the "effect design" is scrolled in the vertical direction in the first display mode.
The "first display mode" is the normal display mode (default display mode) of the "effect design", and for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the display mode ( (composed of the above-mentioned first component and second component). In addition, apart from the "first display mode", it has a "second display mode" (consisting of the above-mentioned second component) consisting only of numerical symbols, and in the variable effect pattern 7 etc. described later. , it is possible to change between the "first display mode" and the "second display mode" during the variable display.

Furthermore, when the variable display is started, the "small performance symbols" are scrolled in the vertical direction, and the player can visually recognize the scrolling display.
In addition, the "small effect design" does not have a "first display mode" and "second display mode" like the "effect pattern", and the display mode remains unchanged no matter what variable effect pattern. . For example, as shown in FIG. 43, etc., it is composed of only numerical symbols and no character symbols are attached. Further, it is always displayed at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 31, and the display position, size, color, and design do not change during the variable performance.

Furthermore, even when the variable display is started, the "pending symbols" are still being displayed, and the player can visually recognize the displayed "pending symbols."
For example, as shown in FIG. 43, "2" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c, which corresponds to the "second storage section" of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. ” indicates that the first special figure determination information is stored. In addition, "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d, which is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. This indicates that the second special figure determination information is not stored.
That is, the "reserved symbol" can display any number from "0" to "4" in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d, and "0" ” is displayed, either the special figure determination information is not stored in the “0th memory unit” or the special figure determination information is stored only in the “0th memory unit”. "1" to "4" indicate the states in which the special figure determination information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section", respectively.

Further, even if the variable display is started, the "specific image" is not displayed, and the player cannot visually recognize the "specific image". In addition, in the effect structure column of FIG. 33, in a variable effect pattern that includes a "specific image", the "specific image" is displayed for "2S" immediately before reaching the temporary stop display period.

These aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1 is reached.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, the "production design" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is a "temporary stop display period", after finishing the vertical scroll display, at the predetermined stop position, It can be seen that it is shaking slightly.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
In other words, the "small effect design" is not displayed with small fluctuations like the "performance pattern" during the "temporary stop display period", but is displayed continuously scrolling in the vertical direction even during the "temporary stop display period". It is designed to do this.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed and cannot be viewed continuously (hereinafter simply referred to as "not displayed").

Then, these modes of "performance symbols", "small performance symbols", "holding symbols", and "specific images" are continued until timing (a) T2 is reached.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect design" is still visible in the "first display mode", but because it is a "determined stop display period", it finishes the slightly swaying display and completely stops at the predetermined stop position. It is possible to visually check how the display is stopped.

In addition, at this timing, the "small effect design" is still visible, but since it is a "fixed stop display period", the vertical scroll display is finished and the "left", "middle", and "right" It is possible to visually see how the "small effect design" consisting of the symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "production symbols", "small production symbols", "holding symbols", and "specific images" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable production Pattern 1 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is variable production pattern 5, and each aspect of the "production symbol", "small production symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" in the "normal variation period" up to timing (b) T1 is , is the same as the "normal fluctuation period" of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect pattern 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, the "production pattern" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is a "normal reach variation period", for example, if the left production pattern 38a and the right production pattern 38c are the same character pattern It is temporarily stopped and displayed with the + number pattern, and it is possible to visually confirm that the medium effect pattern 38b is scrolling in the vertical direction (ready-to-reach state).

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
In other words, the "small effect symbol" does not form a reach state like the "effect symbol" during the "normal reach variation period", but continues to be "left", "middle" even during the "normal reach variation period". , the "right" symbol is scrolled vertically.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T2 is reached.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, the "production design" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is the "temporary stop display period" after the "normal reach fluctuation period", the vertical scroll display is finished. For example, the "5" symbol (left presentation pattern 38a), the "6" pattern (middle presentation pattern 38b), and the "5" pattern (right presentation pattern 38c) are visually observed to be shaking slightly at a predetermined stop position. It is possible.

In addition, each aspect of the "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" at timing (b) T2, and "temporary stop display period" from timing (b) T2 to timing (b) T3. Aspects of "performance design", "small performance design", "retention design", and "specific image", timing (b) "performance design", "small performance design", "retention symbol", and "specific image" at T3 Each aspect, each aspect of the ``effect pattern'', ``small effect pattern'', ``holding pattern'', and ``specific image'' in the ``confirmed stop display period'' from timing (b) T3 to timing (b) T4 is as follows: Since this is the same as the above-mentioned variable effect pattern 1, the explanation will be omitted.
Then, when the timing (b) T4 is reached, the variable performance pattern 5 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variable production pattern 7, which includes "production symbols", "small production symbols", "normal variation period" and "normal reach variation period" from timing (c) T1 to timing (c) T2, Each aspect of the "reserved symbol" and "specific image" is the same as the "normal fluctuation period" and "normal reach fluctuation period" of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect pattern 5, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" forming the ready-to-reach state becomes invisible due to the background image.
Note that the background image includes a whiteout image, a blackout image, and a shielding image (a door image, a sliding door image, etc.).

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
In other words, the "small performance design" is not invisible like the "performance design" during "background switching", but is continuously scrolled in the vertical direction so that it is visible even during "background switching". It looks like this.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3 is reached.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, the "effect design" is visible in the "second display mode". In addition, in the "SP reach variation period" and "SPSP reach variation period", in order to mainly make the content of the reach effect (for example, a confrontation effect between character images, etc.) visible to the player, the "second display mode" is used. In this case, only numerical symbols are displayed in the corner of the display area of the image display device 31, and the display size is also smaller than in the ready-to-reach state in the "first display mode".

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
In addition, as mentioned above, the display mode of the "small performance symbol" does not change even in the "SP reach variation period".

Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4 is reached.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, the "production pattern" is visible in the "second display mode", and the scrolling middle presentation pattern 38b is a numerical pattern different from the left presentation pattern 38a and the right presentation pattern 38c. A temporary stop display will be displayed at .

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "performance symbols", "small performance symbols", "holding symbols", and "specific images" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" becomes invisible due to the specific image being displayed.

Furthermore, at this timing, the "small effect design" continues to be displayed in a vertically scrolling manner so as to be visible.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "reserved symbol" continues to be visible.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" will be displayed so as to be visible.
That is, in the "background switching" at the timing, the "specific image", "small effect pattern", and "holding pattern" are visibly displayed in the display area of the image display device 31.

Then, these aspects of the "performance symbol", "small performance symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6 is reached.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, due to the erasure of the "specific image", the "effect pattern" becomes visible again in the "first display mode".

In addition, each aspect of the "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" at timing (c) T6, and "temporary stop display period" from timing (c) T6 to timing (c) T7. Aspects of "performance symbols", "small performance symbols", "reserved symbols", and "specific images", and timing (c) of "production symbols", "small performance symbols", "retention symbols", and "specific images" at T7 Each aspect, each aspect of the ``effect pattern'', ``small effect pattern'', ``holding pattern'', and ``specific image'' in the ``confirmed stop display period'' from timing (c) T7 to timing (c) T8 is as follows: Since this is the same as the above-mentioned variable effect pattern 1, the explanation will be omitted.
Then, when the timing (c) T8 is reached, the variable performance pattern 7 ends (one game ends).

Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart in FIG. 42, supplementary explanation will be given using the animation in FIG. 43.
Note that FIG. 43 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and shows the case of (b) variation effect pattern 5 in which the "specific image" is not displayed, and (c) the case of variation effect pattern 5 in which the "specific image" is displayed. Case 7 is described.
Note that in the animation of FIG. 43, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 5)
(b) T1 to T2 correspond to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
That is, as the left presentation pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly shaking), and as the right presentation pattern 38c, a "5" pattern consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is displayed temporarily. The "5" symbol (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly swaying) and the middle effect symbol 38b is vertically scrolled to form a ready-to-reach state.

Furthermore, a background image imitating a mountain is displayed as a background image.
Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and a second special symbol reservation number display area 31d are formed, and a reservation number image is displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a small effect pattern 38d consisting of "left", "middle", and "right" symbols is displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
In addition, although not mentioned in the time chart of FIG. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the pending icon display area 31b are displayed, and the variable icon display area 31a has an "O"-shaped pending icon. "1" is displayed, and in the reservation icon display area 31b, a "○"-shaped reservation icon is "2" corresponding to the reservation number image "2" in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c. One is displayed.

(b) T2 to T3 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
That is, as the left effect pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swinging), and as a middle effect pattern 38b, a "5" pattern consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is displayed (slightly shaking). The "6" symbol (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly shaking), and the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is temporarily stopped as the right production symbol 38c. is displayed (slightly shaking).
Note that the other display modes are the same as those in (b) T1 to T2, so their explanation will be omitted.

(b) T3 to T4 correspond to the "determined stop display period".
That is, as the left presentation pattern 38a, the "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern and a number pattern is displayed in a definite stop (completely stopped), and as the middle presentation pattern 38b, a character pattern and a number pattern The "6" symbol (first display mode) consisting of is displayed as a fixed stop (completely stopped), and the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is displayed as the right production symbol 38c. A confirmed stop is displayed (completely stopped).

Further, the small performance symbols 38d consisting of "left", "middle", and "right" symbols are simultaneously fixed and stopped at "5", "6", and "5".
Further, along with the confirmed stop display, the "O"-shaped pending icon is erased from the variable icon display area 31a.

(Display example in variable production pattern 7)
(c) T4 to T5 correspond to "loss notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In the "loss notification", for example, a scene in which an ally character image is defeated by an enemy character image (confrontation effect) is displayed, and an image "losing" indicating the defeat is displayed.
In addition, as the left presentation pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (second display mode) consisting of only numeric symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly shaking), and as the right presentation pattern 38c, a "5" consisting of only numeric symbols is displayed. The symbol (second display mode) is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swinging), and the "6" symbol consisting only of numeric symbols (second display mode) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle effect pattern 38b.
Note that the middle effect pattern 38b is displayed at a display size larger than the display size of the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c at the center of the display area.

Further, as a background image, the background image imitating a mountain that was displayed during the "normal reach variation period" is not displayed, but a background image corresponding to the "confrontation effect" is displayed. In this way, in the "SP reach variation period", a background image that is different from the background image displayed in the "normal variation period" or the "normal reach variation period" is displayed.
Further, in the lower left corner of the image display device 31, a first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and a second special symbol reservation number display area 31d are formed, and a reservation number image is displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the image display device 31, a small effect pattern 38d consisting of "left", "middle", and "right" symbols is displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the time chart of FIG. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the pending icon display area 31b change the player's viewpoint to the SP reach effect during the "SP reach variation period". It is not displayed so that people can direct their attention to it. Note that the period from (c) T2 to (c) T6 in FIG. 42 is not displayed.
In this way, even if the variable icon display area 31a and the pending icon display area 31b are hidden, the pending number image continues to be displayed, so the player can check the pending status by viewing the pending number image as appropriate. can be confirmed.

(c) T5 to T6 correspond to "background switching" after the "SP reach variation period".
In the "background switching", a specific image 31e (an image imitating a shutter) is displayed over the entire display area.
With the display of the specific image 31e, the effect pattern 38 and the character image become invisible.
However, the reserved number image and the small effect pattern 38d are not hidden by the display of the specific image 31e, and are visible even when the specific image 31e is displayed.

(c) T6 to T7 correspond to the "temporary stop display period", and (c) T7 to T8 correspond to the "confirmed stop display period", but the display contents are (b) T2 to Since the content is the same as that described in T3, the explanation will be omitted.

As in variable effect pattern 7, when the display mode of the effect design, background image, etc. changes with the execution of SP reach, (c) after the display of the specific image 31e shown at T5 to T6 is once sandwiched, By returning to the display mode before the execution of SP reach, it is possible to switch the display mode without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In addition, after a loss in SP reach is notified, by displaying the specific image 31e and then returning to the display mode before SP reach, the break in the effect can be made clear, and the reach effect ( This allows the player to clearly understand that the SP reach has ended.

The effect pattern (number pattern part) at (c) T4 to T5 before the specific image 31e is displayed, and the effect pattern (number pattern part) at (c) T6 to T7 after the specific image 31e is displayed. part) has the following characteristics.
That is, the display size of the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c becomes larger after the specific image 31e is displayed than before the specific image 31e is displayed, and the display size of the middle effect pattern 38b becomes larger after the specific image 31e is displayed. The display size is smaller than before the image 31e was displayed.
Thereby, it is possible to clarify the point (what is displayed as the confrontation effect or medium effect pattern 38b) that the player wants to see in the SP reach.
Note that the display size is not limited to this and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the middle effect pattern 38b before the specific image 31e is displayed may also have the same display size as the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c.

Next, using FIG. 44, an example of a production (using the production pattern 38 (predetermined performance) will be explained.
In addition, in FIG. 44, only the image display device 31 is extracted and described, and the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is not displayed, and the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed. Performance pattern 7 is described as an example.
Note that in the animation of FIG. 44, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 1)
(a) T0 to T1 correspond to the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
Note that other display elements (pending number image, etc.) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

(a) T1 to T2 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
During this "temporary stop display period", the character symbols constituting the performance symbol 38 move.
Specifically, each character pattern of the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c performs a series of actions such as raising both hands upward and then lowering both hands.
By performing such an operation, it is possible to give a change to the normal fluctuation (fluctuating performance pattern 1) which lacks change, leading to an improvement in the interest in the game.

(a) T2 to T3 correspond to the "determined stop display period".
Note that the display mode in the "determined stop display period" is the same as that described in FIG. 43, so a description thereof will be omitted.
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, the action effect using the character symbol can be executed during the "temporary stop display period".

(Display example in variable production pattern 7)
The display examples in the variable effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5, (c) T5 to T6, (c) T6 to T7, and (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 44 are the same as those described in FIG. 43. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted, but in the "temporary stop display period" of (c) T6 to T7, the motion performance using the character symbols forming the performance pattern 38 as described in the above-mentioned variable performance pattern 1 is not performed. .
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, the action effect using the character symbol cannot be performed during the "temporary stop display period".
As a result, even though the display of the specific image 31e makes it clear to the player that the reach effect (SP reach) has ended, the action effect using the character symbol is executed during the "temporary stop display period". By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from thinking that the reach performance (SP reach) is continuing.

Note that the performance using the performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period" is not limited to the motion performance, and may be other performance.
For example, the so-called "chance eye" performance where the performance pattern 38 temporarily stops and displays discrete numbers such as "3" symbol, "4" symbol, and "5" symbol, and then develops into a reach performance. If installed, the effect may be such that the effect pattern 38 is highlighted (added with a predetermined effect image) during the "temporary stop display period."
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it may be possible to perform an effect such as emphasizing the effect pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period".

Also, for example, if the production pattern 38 is a "3" symbol, a "5" symbol, a "7" symbol, etc., a combination of odd symbols can be displayed in a continuous fixed stop over multiple fluctuations, and a jackpot will be won in the fluctuation after the multiple fluctuations. In the case of installing a look-ahead effect that makes the user look forward to being given, the effect may be such that the effect pattern 38 is displayed in color (adding a predetermined color image) during the "temporary stop display period."
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it may be possible to perform an effect such as displaying the effect pattern 38 in color during the "temporary stop display period".
In addition, in the production, when a combination of symbols is displayed in a fixed and stopped manner over multiple variations, the combination of symbols is not limited to a combination of odd symbols, but may also be a combination of even symbols, "3" symbol, A combination of symbols arranged in order, such as a "4" symbol and a "5" symbol, may also be used.
In addition, by turning off (darkening) the effect pattern 38, it may be an effect that suggests a transition to SP reach or the like.

Next, the display mode of the "specific image" for each gaming state will be explained using FIG. 45.
It should be noted that FIG. 45 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and shows a case in which the variable production pattern 7 is executed in the "normal gaming state" (normal) and a case in which the variable production pattern 7 is executed in the "high probability gaming state" (high probability). A case in which variation effect pattern 7 is executed is described.
Note that in the animation of FIG. 45, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Example of display in variable performance pattern 7 in normal gaming state)
Display examples in variable effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (normal), (c) T5 to T6 (normal), (c) T6 to T7 (normal), and (c) T7 to T8 (normal) are shown in the figure. Since the content is the same as that described in 43, the explanation will be omitted.

(Example of display in variable production pattern 7 of high probability gaming state)
(c) T4 to T5 (high probability) correspond to "loss notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
(c) T4 to T5 (high probability), compared to (c) T4 to T5 (normal), have a "RUSH medium image 31f" indicating that the game is in a high probability game state; The difference is that a "right-handed hit image 31g" indicating that a right-handed hit is to be performed is also displayed, and the other display modes are the same, but the game state changes in the pending number image and the small performance symbol 38d. However, the display mode (design, size, etc.) remains unchanged.

(c) T5 to T6 (high probability) correspond to "background switching" after the "SP reach variation period".
In (c) T5 to T6 (high probability), a specific image 31e consisting of the same image as in (c) T5 to T6 (normal) is displayed. However, a "rushing image 31f" and a "right-hand hitting image 31g" are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the specific image 31e.
In this way, the essential information in the gaming state (the RUSH image 31f, the right-handed image 31g) is displayed, but the specific image 31e itself is the same as in the normal gaming state.
This eliminates the need to prepare specific images 31e for the normal game state and for the high probability game state, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

(c) T6 to T7 (high probability) correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
In the high probability game state, even in the "temporary stop display period", the performance symbols 38 remain in the "second display mode", and the same holds true in the subsequent "determined stop display period".
That is, in the high probability game state, the performance symbols 38 are always in the "second display mode".
Further, a continuous jackpot number image 31h (an image of "3 wins") indicating the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive winnings) is displayed.
Additionally, a background image simulating night is displayed, indicating that the game is in a high-probability gaming state.
Note that other display elements (pending number image, etc.) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

(c) T7 to T8 (high probability) correspond to the "determined stop display period".
(c) T7 to T8 (high probability), compared to (c) T7 to T8 (normal), have a night background image, a RUSH medium image 31f indicating that a high probability gaming state is in progress, and a high probability gaming state. The difference is that during the state, a right-handed hit image 31g indicating that a right-handed hit is to be performed, a continuous jackpot number image 31h, and a production pattern 38 of the "second display mode" are displayed, and other display modes are the same. It is.

In addition, in FIG. 45, although the normal game state and the high probability game state were explained as examples, the common specific image 31e may be displayed also in the time-saving game state.
This allows the common specific image 31e to be used in the normal game state, high probability game state, and time-saving game state, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.
Although a common specific image 31e is displayed in the time-saving gaming state and the high probability gaming state, a different specific image 31e (with a different design) may be displayed in the normal gaming state.

Next, the display manner of the "specific image" for each mode will be explained using FIG. 46.
Note that FIG. 46 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and shown, and shows a case in which variable production pattern 7 is executed in mode A in the "normal gaming state" (normal), and a case in which the variable effect pattern 7 is executed in mode A in the "normal gaming state" (normal). A case in which variable effect pattern 7 is executed in mode B is described.
Note that in the animation of FIG. 46, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

In order to prevent players from getting bored, the mode is changed every time a predetermined number of fluctuations or every time a reach effect is executed. The mode of the hold icon is different.
For example, in mode A, a background image simulating a mountain is displayed, while in mode B, a background image simulating an ocean is displayed.
In this embodiment, for convenience, mode A and mode B will be used in the explanation, but a plurality of modes may be included.
Note that the mode has the same meaning as a so-called "stage (direction stage)."
Furthermore, the mode may be switched (transferred to another mode) by the player's operation of the performance button 35.

(Example of display in variable performance pattern 7 in normal gaming state mode A)
(c) T4-T5 (Mode A), (c) T5-T6 (Mode A), (c) T6-T7 (Mode A), (c) T7-T8 (Mode A) table in variable production pattern 7 The example is the same as that described in FIG. 43, so the explanation will be omitted, except that in (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), "mode A image 31j" indicating mode A is displayed. differ.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 7 in normal gaming state mode B)
The display examples in the variable effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (mode B) and (c) T5 to T6 (mode B) are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 43, so the explanation will be omitted.

(c) T6 to T7 (mode B) correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
(c) T6 to T7 (mode B), compared to (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), display a background image imitating the sea, and the character designs that make up the production pattern 38 also have a sea concept. The design is as follows.
In addition, a "mode B image 31k" indicating mode B is displayed. In addition, the icons displayed in the variable icon display area 31a and the pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 31b are also different from those in mode A. The design is (diamond).
Note that the display manner (design, size, etc.) of the reserved number image and the small effect pattern 38d are the same as in mode A. That is, even if the mode changes, the display mode remains unchanged.

(c) T7 to T8 (mode B) correspond to the "determined stop display period".
That is, the production pattern 38 in mode B is displayed as a fixed stop (completely stopped).

In this way, while preventing the player from getting bored by making the background image different depending on the mode, using the same specific image 31e for all modes leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

In FIG. 46, mode A in the normal gaming state and mode B in the normal gaming state have been explained, but FIG. can be applied.

Note that a specific image 31e common to mode A and mode B is displayed, and a specific image 31e common to mode C and mode D (a specific image whose design is different from the specific image 31e displayed in mode A and mode B) is displayed. 31e) may be displayed.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 42 to 46 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, the display mode of the effect pattern 38 is changed before and after the specific image 31e is displayed, but it does not have to be changed.
Further, in FIGS. 42 to 46, the display mode of the small effect pattern 38d is not changed before and after the specific image 31e is displayed, but it may be changed.

(Summary of Figures 42 to 46)
That is, FIGS. 42 to 46 have the following features.

That is,
While the specific image 31e is being displayed (for example, from T5 to T6 in FIG. 43(c)),
Small effect pattern 38d→Displayed in a visible manner.
After displaying the specific image 31e (for example, (c) T6 to T7 in FIG. 43),
Small effect pattern 38d→Displayed in a visible manner.
Performance pattern 38→Visibly displayed.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, the end of the effect can be made clear by the specific image 31e, and the player can clearly understand that the reach effect (SP reach effect) has ended.
Further, by making the effect pattern 38 invisible while the specific image 31e is displayed, the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-reach effect (SP ready-to-win) has ended.
Further, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, even if the effect pattern 38 is not visible, at least the small effect pattern 38d is displayed in a visible manner, so that the fluctuation situation can be confirmed.
In addition, while the specific image 31e is displayed, not only the small effect pattern 38d but also the pending number image is displayed so that the pending number image is visibly displayed, so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed by the update status of the pending number image.
In addition, the effect pattern 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the specific image 31e is displayed and after the specific image 31e is displayed, so it is visible while the specific image 31e is displayed. By changing the display mode with the display of the specific image 31e in between, it is possible to switch the display mode without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

That is,
Before (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43) the specific image 31e is displayed,
The display mode of the small effect pattern 38d → does not change.
The display mode of the effect pattern 38 changes from the second display mode (for example, a display mode consisting of only numbers) to the first display mode (for example, a display mode consisting of numbers + characters).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, for example, the large display size effect pattern 38 that the player is watching changes through the display of the specific image 31e, so the display of the specific image 31e indicates that the reach effect (SP reach) has ended. It is possible to make the player understand clearly.

That is,
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 7) that involves displaying the specific image 31e,
During the temporary suspension display period,
A performance using the performance pattern 38 (for example, a movement performance using a character pattern) -> not executed.
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) that does not involve displaying the specific image 31e,
During the temporary suspension display period,
A performance using the performance pattern 38 (for example, motion performance using a character pattern) -> can be executed.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, it is possible to give a change to the variable performance pattern 1, which does not involve the display of the specific image 31e and lacks change, leading to an improvement in the interest in the game.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern 7 that involves the display of the specific image 31e, although the display of the specific image 31e makes it clear to the player that the reach performance (SP reach) has ended, the "temporary stop display" It is possible to prevent the player from being made to think that the ready-to-reach presentation (SP ready-to-go) is continuing by executing the action presentation using the character design during the "period".

That is,
Before (for example, T4 to T5 in (c) in FIG. 43) and after (for example, T7 to T8 in (c) in FIG. 43) the specific image 31e is displayed,
Display mode of pending number image → does not change (for example, size, design, etc. do not change).
The display mode of the effect pattern 38 → changes (for example, the second display mode composed of only numbers changes to the first display mode composed of numbers + characters).
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, the end of the effect can be made clear by the specific image 31e, and the player can clearly understand that the reach effect (SP reach effect) has ended.
Further, by making the effect pattern 38 invisible while the specific image 31e is displayed, the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-reach effect (SP ready-to-win) has ended.
Further, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, even if the effect pattern 38 is not visible, at least the reserved number image is displayed so that it can be seen, so the fluctuation situation can be checked.
Further, while the specific image 31e is displayed, not only the pending number image but also the small effect pattern 38d is visibly displayed, so that the fluctuation situation can be confirmed by the small effect pattern 38d.
In addition, the effect pattern 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the specific image 31e is displayed and after the specific image 31e is displayed, so it is visible while the specific image 31e is displayed. By changing the display mode with the display of the specific image 31e in between, it is possible to switch the display mode without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

That is,
For example, if you execute variable production pattern 7 in the normal gaming state,
A specific image 31e (eg, (c) T5 to T6 (normal) in FIG. 45) is displayed.
and,
The specific image 31e is
It can also be displayed in a specific gaming state (eg, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) (eg, T5 to T6 (high probability) in FIG. 45(c)).
It has such characteristics.
This eliminates the need to prepare specific images 31e for each gaming state, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

That is,
For example, if you execute variable effect pattern 7 in the first mode,
A specific image 31e (eg, (c) T5 to T6 (mode A) in FIG. 46) is displayed.
and,
The specific image 31e is
Display is also possible in the second mode (for example, T5 to T6 (mode B) in FIG. 46(c)).
It has such characteristics.
This eliminates the need to prepare specific images 31e for each mode, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

Next, the second characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 47 to 51.
Note that some of the descriptions in Figures 47 to 51 are omitted because they mainly refer to the "sounds" during the fluctuating performance, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 may be combined as appropriate. Can be used.

FIG. 47 shows a music composition in a variable performance pattern. For example, in the case of variable performance pattern 1, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 when variable performance pattern 1 is being executed. , indicating that the number of songs is "one", which is "song A".
Furthermore, in the case of variable performance pattern 5, when variable performance pattern 5 is being executed, after "music A" is output from the audio output device 32, "music B" is output from the audio output device 32. , indicating that the number of songs is "two", "song A" and "song B".
The same idea applies to other variable performance patterns, so we will omit the explanation of other variable performance patterns, but the overall trend is that the less likely the reach effect is to be executed in the variable effect pattern, the more likely the variable effect is to be executed. The number (types) of songs that are output during the execution of the variable production pattern is smaller, and the more the variation production pattern in which the reach production is executed, the greater the number (type) of songs that are output during the execution of the variation production. Even in the production pattern, the number (types) of songs output during execution of variable production tends to increase, such as normal reach<SP reach≒SPSP reach.
Note that regarding "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "song E", and "resurrection music" described in FIG. 47, even if the music consists of only a melody. Alternatively, the song may consist of a melody and lyrics. However, if the first half of the fluctuating performance pattern consists of only a melody, and the second half of the fluctuating performance pattern consists of melody + lyrics, expectations for the jackpot game to be played can be improved. Therefore, for example, it is desirable that "Song A" and "Song B" be composed of only melodies, and that "Song C", "Song D", "Song E", and "Resurrection music" be composed of melody + lyrics. . Thereby, the song structure can improve expectations for the execution of a jackpot game.

FIG. 48 is a time chart 2 showing details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), in which (a) shows details of variable effect pattern 1, and (b) shows details of variable effect pattern 5. (c) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7, and (d) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 16.
Further, details are shown for each variable performance pattern regarding the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31, BGM (music) output from the audio output device 32, and stop sound.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the fluctuation effect pattern 1, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1 is reached.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, a "stop sound" is output from the audio output device 32.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output. That is, the "stop sound" is a sound that is output during the temporary stop display period.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variation effect pattern 1 is ended (1 The game ends).

(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is a variation effect pattern 5, and timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is not being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" is output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is not being output. That is, with the end of the normal reach, the music associated with the execution of the normal reach ends.
Furthermore, at this timing, a "stop sound" is output from the audio output device 32.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T3.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is not being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T4, and when timing (b) T4 is reached, the variable production pattern 5 (one game ends).
In addition, in the variation effect pattern 5, the stop sound is output, but it may not be output. That is, in a variable performance pattern in which a reach performance or higher is performed, the "stop sound" may not be output.

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1 is reached.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is not being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, by stopping all music, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed in a visible manner.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" continue until timing (c) T8, and reach timing (c) T8. Then, the variable performance pattern 7 ends (one game ends).

As shown in the above variation effect pattern 7, the period of "background switching" (first period) from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period" and the "SP reach variation period" ending with " During the "background switching" period (second period) up to the "temporary stop display period", no music is being output.
Note that "no music is being output" may mean a state in which no music data is being output, or a state in which music data is being output but no sound is being output from the audio output device 32. That is, as long as the music is an "inaudible sound" based on the player, any state may be used.
Thereby, in the first period, when changing from a song of normal reach to a song of SP reach, it is possible to pause once, so that it is possible to clearly recognize that the song has been changed.
Furthermore, in the second period, there is no sound, so that it can be clearly recognized that the ready-to-reach effect has ended.
Although the first period and the second period are silent, other periods may be silent.

In addition, as shown in variable production pattern 7, before the "specific image" is displayed, songs (song A, song B, song C) can be output, but after the "specific image" is displayed, the songs are output. do not.
That is, by outputting music before displaying the "specific image" as a reference, expectations for a jackpot can be improved. On the other hand, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for a jackpot from being given. Furthermore, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.

(Timing (d) T0)
(d) is the fluctuation effect pattern 16, and timing (d) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
Timing (d) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T2.

(Timing (d) T2)
Timing (d) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T3.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is not being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T4.

(Timing (d) T4)
Timing (d) T4 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach variation period" to the "SPSP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T5.

(Timing (d) T5)
Timing (d) T5 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SPSP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach will be output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T6.

(Timing (d) T6)
Timing (d) T6 is the timing to perform a "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, by stopping all music, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T7.

(Timing (d) T7)
Timing (d) T7 is the timing at which the "SPSP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SPSP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed in a visible manner.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T8.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (d) T7 to timing (d) T8 is "2S".

(Timing (d) T8)
Timing (d) T8 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T9.

(Timing (d) T9)
Timing (d) T9 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Further, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T10, and at timing ( d) When reaching T10, the variable effect pattern 16 ends (one game ends).

That is, in the variable performance pattern 7 and the variable performance pattern 16, unlike the variable performance pattern 1 and the variable performance pattern 5, a "specific image" is displayed, and no music is output from the loss notification until the end of one game. There is no sound, and there is no sound.
Further, even in the "temporary stop display period", the "stop sound" is not output.
For example, since the variation effect pattern 1 and the variation effect pattern 5 are selected frequently, they may be executed continuously over a plurality of variations. Therefore, it is necessary to output a "stop sound" to clarify the break between fluctuations. On the other hand, since the selection frequency of the variation effect pattern 7 and the variation effect pattern 16 is low, it is rare that they are executed continuously over a plurality of variations. Therefore, even if the "stop sound" is not output, the break between the fluctuations becomes clear, so the reasoning is that the "stop sound" is not output in the fluctuation performance pattern 7 and the fluctuation performance pattern 16.
In addition, the variable effect pattern 1 and the variable effect pattern 5 are variable effect patterns in which there is little change in the background image, etc. during the variable effect, and are also not variable effect patterns in which a "specific image" is displayed. The break is not clear. In particular, since there is a high possibility that multiple variations will be executed continuously, the breaks in the performance will become even more unclear.
Therefore, in such a variable performance pattern, by outputting a "stop sound", it is possible to clarify the break in the performance.
On the other hand, since the variable effect pattern 7 and the variable effect pattern 16 are variable effect patterns that are rich in changes such as the background image during the variable effect, the break in the effect becomes clear to some extent due to changes in the background image, etc. There is no need to output a "stop sound".
Furthermore, since this is also a variable performance pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed, the display of the "specific image" can also be used to notify the end of the performance without outputting a "stop sound." In this way, it is possible to notify suitable performance breaks according to the variable performance pattern.

Next, using time chart 3 in FIG. 49, the characteristics of each variable performance pattern when there is no subsequent hold when the variable performance is finished (at the end of one game) will be explained.
In FIG. 49, a comparison will be made between variable effect pattern 1 and variable effect pattern 7.

In addition, "pending 0" means, in the example of variable performance pattern 1, that from (a) T0 to (a) T3, special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage section"; The special figure determination information is not stored in the "1st storage part" to "4th storage part" (FIG. 12), and (a) T3 ~ is "0th storage part", "1st storage part" to " This indicates that the special figure determination information is not stored in any of the "fourth storage section".
Similarly, in the example of variable production pattern 7, the special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage section" from (c) T0 to (c) T8, but the special figure determination information is stored in the "1st storage section" to The special figure determination information is not stored in the "4th storage section" (Fig. 12), and (c) T8~ is the "0th storage section", "1st storage section" - "4th storage section". This indicates that special figure determination information is not stored in any of them.

Moreover, the "sound effect" refers to the above-mentioned SE, and is a sound different from BGM (song).
Furthermore, the "start winning sound" is a sound that is output when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 and the color of the hold icon changes from the time of ball entering. For example, if you want to display a hold icon with a blue hold icon from the time the ball enters, the "first starting prize sound" is output, and if you want to display the hold icon with a green hold icon from the time the ball enters, the "second start winning sound" is output. It is possible to output sounds depending on the color, such as "start winning sound".
In addition, the "start winning sound" is not limited to changing the color of the hold icon from the time of ball entry, but is simply a sound that notifies that a game ball has entered the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. (so-called winning notification sound) may also be used.

Further, the "board lighting device" refers to the board lighting device 34a (FIG. 4), and the "frame lighting device" refers to the frame lighting device 34b (FIG. 4).
In addition, the "light emission LV." of these lighting devices indicates the brightness of each lighting device, and the higher the value, the brighter the light is intended to be. LV1<LV2<LV3<LV4<LV5. ing. Note that the brightness refers to, for example, the number of LEDs lit is the same between LV1 and LV2, but the brightness may be varied depending on the intensity of light emission, or the brightness can be changed by varying the number of LEDs lit. You can also let
Note that the brightness of LV5 is the brightness that is selected when various errors shown in FIG. 71, which will be described later, occur.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the fluctuation effect pattern 1, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "pending 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1 is reached.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "pending 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2 is reached.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information was not stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending 0), and the special figure judgment information that was stored in the "zero storage section" was not stored. The figure determination information is deleted.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable effect pattern 1 is ended (1 The game ends).

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is the timing at which the "determined stop display period" ends and shifts to the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is also stored in the "0th storage section". is not remembered.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "pending 0", and "specific image" are continued for "10S" up to timing (a) T4.
In other words, when the fluctuating performance is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent suspension, if the immediately preceding fluctuating performance pattern is fluctuating performance pattern 1, after the "determined stop display period" ends Even during the "customer waiting period", the "song A" that was being output while the variable performance pattern 1 was being executed continues to be output.
This makes it possible to give the feeling that the fluctuating performance is continuing even during the "waiting period for customers," leading to increased interest in the game.
Note that the variable performance pattern in which music continues to be output even during the "waiting period for customers" is not limited to the variable performance pattern 1. For example, the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 in which the "specific image" is not displayed in case of a loss may be executed.

(Timing (a) T4)
Timing (a) T4 is the timing when "10S" has elapsed after reaching the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A" is not being output. That is, when the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state) is reached, the music continues to be output for "10S", but the music stops after "10S" has elapsed.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is also stored in the "0th storage section". is not remembered.
From then on, unless a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, this mode continues.

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1 is reached.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is not being output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, in "background switching", when displaying a shielding image, it is possible to output a shielding sound or the like.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, when displaying a title indicating the contents of SP reach, it is possible to output a sound indicating that the title has been displayed.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, by stopping all music, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, it is possible to output a sound to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, "sound effects" can be output. For example, it is possible to output a sound accompanying the display of a "specific image".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV2. That is, the brightness is lowered as the "specific image" is displayed. Thereby, when the "specific image" is displayed, the brightness of the entire gaming machine 1 is lowered, so that the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed in a visible manner.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

That is, the "start winning sound" can be output even while the "specific image" is being displayed. Note that while the "specific image" is being displayed, the hold icon will not be displayed, as described in FIG. Even when performing a look-ahead effect that changes the color, it is not possible to display a pending icon whose color changes in real time.
However, since it is possible to output the "starting winning sound" corresponding to the color being changed, even if the pending icon whose color has changed is not displayed, a skilled player can output the "starting winning sound" You can determine what color the hold icon is by listening to it.
In addition, if the "start winning sound" is not output, it is assumed that a pending icon whose color suddenly changes after the "specific image" is displayed may be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. By making it possible to output "", it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage part" to "fourth storage part" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is only stored in the "0th storage part". is memorized.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information was not stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending 0), and the special figure judgment information that was stored in the "zero storage section" was not stored. The figure determination information is deleted.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" These aspects of "light emission LV." and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T8, and when timing (c) T8 is reached, variable effect pattern 7 ends (one game ends). Become.

(Timing (c) T8)
Timing (c) T8 is the timing at which the "determined stop display period" ends and shifts to the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, no special figure judgment information is stored in the "first storage section" to "fourth storage section" (pending is 0), and special figure judgment information is also stored in the "0th storage section". is not remembered.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "board lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" are emitting light at a brightness of LV3.

Then, "Song A", "Song B", "Song C", "Pending 0", "Sound effect", "Start winning sound", "Light emission LV of board lighting device", "Song of frame lighting device" From then on, these aspects of the light emitting LV.'' continue unless a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15.

In other words, when the variable effect is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent suspension, if the variable effect pattern executed immediately before is variable effect pattern 7, after the "determined stop display period" ends During the "waiting period for customers", the music that was being output while variable performance pattern 7 was being executed is not output.
Note that the variable performance pattern in which music is not output during the "waiting period for customers" is not limited to the variable performance pattern 7. For example, the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 in which a "specific image" is displayed in case of a loss may be applied.
In this way, in a variable production pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed, music is not output during the "waiting period for customers," and as described above, in a variable production pattern in which a "specific image" is not displayed, The music will continue to be output during the "waiting period for customers."
The reason for doing this is also due to the selection frequency of the variable effect pattern, and the variable effect pattern in which the ``specific image'' is not displayed appears more frequently than the variable effect pattern in which the ``specific image'' is displayed. Therefore, in such a highly frequent variable production pattern, the music continues to be output even when the "customer waiting period" is reached.

Note that FIG. 49 assumes a case where variable effect pattern 1 is executed in the normal gaming state and a case where variable effect pattern 7 is executed in the normal gaming state.
On the other hand, in the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, music may be continuously output during the "customer waiting period" even in a variable performance pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed in case of a loss. Thereby, even during the "customer waiting period", it is possible to notify the player that an advantageous state (time saving gaming state, high probability gaming state) continues.

Next, using time chart 4 in FIG. 50, a variable effect pattern at the time of a jackpot will be explained.
In FIG. 50, a comparison between the variable effect pattern 20 and the variable effect pattern 30 will be explained.
It should be noted that there is a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed even in the event of a jackpot, and in this embodiment, the variable effect pattern 30 corresponds to this pattern.

(Timing (e) T0)
(e) is a variable effect pattern 20, and timing (e) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" that can be output when notifying a jackpot is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" that can be output at the opening of the jackpot is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T1. Ru.

(Timing (e) T1)
Timing (e) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and shifts to the "normal reach fluctuation period."
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T2. Ru.

(Timing (e) T2)
Timing (e) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and transitions to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T3. Ru.

(Timing (e) T3)
Timing (e) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SP reach will be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T4. Ru.

(Timing (e) T4)
Timing (e) T4 is a timing at which "big hit notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the "SP reach variation period". Note that in the drawings, it is written as "777" for convenience.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, a "jackpot sound effect" is output. In other words, a sound effect (for example, a squeal) is output to notify that the player has won a jackpot.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T5. Ru.

(Timing (e) T5)
Timing (e) T5 is the timing at which the "SP reach variation period" ends and shifts to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T6. Ru.

(Timing (e) T6)
Timing (e) T6 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" continue until timing (e) T7. Ru.

(Timing (e) T7)
Timing (e) T7 is the timing at which the "determined stop display period" ends and shifts to the "jackpot OP (opening)".
At the timing, the "jackpot OP song" is output. From then on, the "jackpot OP song" is output until the jackpot OP ends and the first round game begins.
In this way, the "specific image" is basically not displayed in the variable presentation pattern when a jackpot is won.
That is, in this embodiment, the display of the "specific image" can be said to be the notification that the result of the jackpot determination was a "loss".
However, as an exception, in the following variable effect pattern 30, a specific image is displayed, so a description thereof will be given below.

(Timing (f) T0)
(f) is a variable effect pattern 30, and timing (f) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started. When the variable display starts, the audio output device 32 outputs "Song A."
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" and "song D" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, the "resurrection music" that can be output during the execution of the revival performance in which jackpot notification is performed in reverse after the loss notification is once performed is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T1.

(Timing (f) T1)
Timing (f) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the transition to the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music will be changed to one associated with the execution of normal reach.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is not being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T2.

(Timing (f) T2)
Timing (f) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach variation period" to the "SPSP reach variation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is being output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T3.

(Timing (f) T3)
Timing (f) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "SPSP reach variation period" begins.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, "song D" is output. That is, music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach will be output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T4.

(Timing (f) T4)
Timing (f) T4 is the timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output. That is, by stopping all music, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T5.

(Timing (f) T5)
Timing (f) T5 is the timing at which the "SPSP reach variation period" ends and the transition is made to "background switching" for switching from the "SPSP reach variation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed in a visible manner.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T6.
Note that the display time of the "specific image" from timing (f) T5 to timing (f) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (f) T6)
Timing (f) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" ends and the transition to the "temporary stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T7.

(Timing (f) T7)
Timing (f) T7 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" ends and the transition to the "resurrection effect" begins.
That is, if it is a loss, the "temporary stop display period" ends and the game moves to the "determined stop display period", but if it is a jackpot, the game moves to the "resurrection performance" at the timing.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is output. That is, along with the execution of the revival performance, the "resurrection music" is output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T8.

(Timing (f) T8)
Timing (f) T8 is the timing at which the "jackpot notification" is performed during the "resurrection performance."
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is being output.
Also, at this timing, a "jackpot sound effect" is output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T9.

(Timing (f) T9)
Timing (f) T9 is the timing at which the "resurrection performance" ends and the transition to the "determined stop display period" begins.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot sound effect" is not output.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "jackpot OP song" is not output.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "Song A", "Song B", "Song D", "Resurrection music", "Jackpot sound effect", "Jackpot OP music", and "Specific image" are determined by the timing (f) This continues until T10.

(Timing (f) T10)
Timing (f) T10 is the timing at which the "determined stop display period" ends and the game shifts to the "jackpot OP (opening)".
At the timing, the "jackpot OP song" is output. From then on, the "jackpot OP song" is output until the jackpot OP ends and the first round game begins.
As described above, in the variable performance pattern 30 for a jackpot accompanied by a revival performance, a specific image is exceptionally displayed.
However, even from the distribution ratio shown in Figure 33, it is rare that the variable performance pattern 30 is selected when a jackpot hits, so when comparing the losses and the jackpots, it is overwhelmingly the case when the losses occur. The relationship is such that "specific images" are more likely to appear.

In this way, the jackpot variable effect pattern 30 that involves displaying a specific image has a larger number of songs output within one variable effect than the jackpot variable effect pattern 20 that does not involve the display of a specific image. It is in. Thereby, the interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, since the variable effect pattern 20 is only mentioned as an example, the variable effect pattern 20 can be replaced with another variable effect pattern of a jackpot that does not involve the display of a specific image.
In that case, according to FIG. 47, the number of songs in the variable performance pattern 29 is "4", and the number of songs in the variable performance pattern 30 is "4", according to FIG. However, since the number of songs in other variable production patterns is "3", in most of the variable production patterns for jackpots, the display of a specific image is more effective than the variation production pattern that does not involve the display of a specific image. The relationship is that the variable production pattern accompanied by has a larger number of songs.

Next, using time chart 5 in FIG. 51, a comparison will be made between a variable effect pattern at the time of a loss that does not involve the display of a specific image and a variable effect pattern at the time of a jackpot that does not involve the display of a specific image.
In FIG. 51, a variable presentation pattern 1 and a variable presentation pattern 5 will be listed as variable presentation patterns when a loss occurs, and a variable presentation pattern 20 will be cited as a variable presentation pattern when a jackpot is won. The pattern has already been described in FIG. 48, and the fluctuating production pattern at the time of a jackpot has already been described in FIG. 50, so a detailed explanation of the time chart will be omitted.

That is, in a variable performance pattern that does not involve the display of a specific image in a loss, the number of songs is "1" or "2" (see FIG. 47), and in a variable performance pattern that does not involve the display of a specific image in a jackpot, The number of songs is "3" or "4".
Therefore, the number of songs that are output in one variable performance is larger in a variable performance pattern that does not involve displaying a specific image in a jackpot than in a variable performance pattern that does not involve displaying a specific image in a loss. be.
In other words, if the specific image is not displayed, the level of expectation for a jackpot may change depending on the number of songs, so the game enjoyment within one variable performance can be improved depending on whether the specific image is displayed and the number of songs. can do.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 47 to 51 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

(Summary of Figures 47 to 51)
That is, FIGS. 47 to 51 have the following features.

That is,
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, if step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
The variable effect patterns (for example, variable effect patterns 7 to 18) that involve displaying the specific image 31e are as follows:
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, if step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
Compared to variable effect patterns that do not involve displaying the specific image 31e (for example, variable effect patterns 1 to 6),
It is easy to execute a reach effect consisting of a plurality of songs (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 1. On the other hand, the variable effect pattern 7 is This is a variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs for the reach effect is 2).
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, the interest in the game can be improved.

That is,
The first reach performance (for example, variable performance pattern 7) → the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs in the reach performance is 2),
Since the second reach performance (for example, variable performance pattern 16)→the number of songs is 4 (the number of songs in the reach performance is 3), the numbers of songs are different.
And (even if the number of songs is different)
When displaying the specific image 31e after executing the first reach effect (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48),
There is a case where the specific image 31e is displayed after the second reach effect is executed (for example, (d) T7 to (d) T8 in FIG. 48).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, the number of songs is different for each variable performance pattern that performs a reach effect, so it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.Also, even in variable performance patterns that perform a reach effect with a different number of songs, a specific image is displayed after performing a reach effect. 31e is displayed, it is possible to clearly recognize the timing at which the reach effect has ended.

That is,
In the variable performance, specific performances accompanied by music (eg, variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) can be executed.
Among the specific performances, at least a part of the period (for example, (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, ie, "background switching") is a period without music.
Among the specific performances, the period in which the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, ie, "background switching") is a period without music.
It has such characteristics.
As a result, for example, during the period from (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, it is possible to take a pause when changing from a normal reach song to a SP reach song, so the song can be changed without any discomfort. It can be carried out.
Further, for example, in the period from (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, there is no sound, so that it can be clearly recognized that the ready-to-reach effect has ended.

In other words, in the variable performance,
Before the specific image 31e is displayed → accompanied by music (for example, in the case of variable production pattern 7, music A, music B, and music C are output).
After the specific image 31e is displayed -> no music (for example, no music is output).
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, by outputting music before displaying the "specific image" as a reference, it is possible to improve expectations for a jackpot. On the other hand, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for a jackpot from being given.

That is,
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 7) that involves displaying the specific image 31e,
"Stop sound" in the "temporary stop display period" is not output (for example, (c) T6 to (c) T7 in FIG. 48).
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) that does not involve displaying the specific image 31e,
The "stop sound" in the "temporary stop display period" is output (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T2 in FIG. 48).
It has such characteristics.
This makes it possible to output a suitable "stop sound" depending on the frequency of selection and the content of the performance.

Next, the third characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 52 to 57.
Note that in Figures 52 to 57, some descriptions are omitted because they mainly refer to preview performances, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 and those described in Figures 47 to 51 are The contents can be used in combination as appropriate.

FIG. 52 is a time chart 6 showing the details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), and (a) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 10, mainly showing the details of the pseudo series. (b) shows the details of the variable performance pattern 5, mainly showing the details of the dialogue preview. (c) shows the details of the variable performance pattern 7, mainly showing the details of the roulette preview performance. (d) shows the details of the variable performance pattern 33, mainly showing the details of the SU preview performance.
Further, details are shown for each variable effect pattern regarding the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 and the preview effect.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the variable effect pattern 10, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1 is reached.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing of transition from the "normal fluctuation period" to the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period."
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a character image "Continue!" (corresponding to the dialogue preview effect) suggesting that the pseudo-rendition will continue.
Furthermore, after that, a "NEXT symbol" suggesting execution of a pseudo series is displayed on the "image display device" until timing (a) T2.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period", the "line preview performance", which is one aspect of the preview performance, can be executed redundantly.
It should be noted that it is possible to perform not only the "dialogue preview performance" but also other preview performances (not shown).
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued from timing (a) T2 to timing (a) T3.

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is the timing at which the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period" shifts to the "continuation performance".
At this timing, a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-continuation has continued is displayed on the "image display device."
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T4.

(Timing (a) T4)
Timing (a) T4 is the timing at which the "continuous performance" shifts to the "pseudo-sequence 2 fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "pseudo continuous 2 variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T5.

(Timing (a) T5)
Timing (a) T5 is the timing at which the "pseudo series 2 fluctuation period" shifts to the "pseudo series 3 notification period".
At this timing, a character image "Continue!?" indicating that the pseudo-relationship will continue is displayed on the "image display device."
Furthermore, after that, a "NEXT symbol" suggesting execution of a pseudo series is displayed on the "image display device" until timing (a) T6.
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo series 3 notification period", the "line preview performance", which is one aspect of the preview performance, can be executed overlappingly.
It should be noted that it is possible to perform not only the "dialogue preview performance" but also other preview performances (not shown).
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued from timing (a) T6 to timing (a) T7.

(Timing (a) T7)
Timing (a) T7 is the timing at which the "pseudo continuous 3 notification period" shifts to the "continuation performance".
At this timing, a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-continuation has continued is displayed on the "image display device."
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T8.

(Timing (a) T8)
Timing (a) T8 is the timing at which the "continuous performance" shifts to the "pseudo series 3 variation period".
At this timing, the "pseudo series 3 variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T9.

(Timing (a) T9)
Timing (a) T9 is the timing of transition from the "pseudo run 3 fluctuation period" to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T10.

(Timing (a) T10)
Timing (a) T10 is the timing of transition from the "normal reach variation period" to the "background switching".
At this timing, the "switching image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T11.

(Timing (a) T11)
Timing (a) T11 is the timing of transition from "background switching" to "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, the "SP reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T12.

(Timing (a) T12)
Timing (a) T12 is a timing at which "loss notification" is performed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach variation period".
At this timing, the "loss notification image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T13.

(Timing (a) T13)
Timing (a) T13 is the timing of transition from the "SP reach variation period" to the "background switching".
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for 2S.
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed. That is, in the "background switching" from timing (a) T13 to timing (a) T14, "line preview performance", which is one aspect of the preview performance, cannot be executed redundantly. It should be noted that not only the "dialogue preview production" but also other preview productions not shown in the figure cannot be performed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T14.

(Timing (a) T14)
Timing (a) T14 is the timing of transition from "background switching" to "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "temporary stopped image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T15.

(Timing (a) T15)
Timing (a) T15 is the timing at which the "temporary stop display period" shifts to the "determined stop display period".
At this timing, the "confirmed still image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Further, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", "line preview production", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T16, and when timing (a) T16 is reached, the variable production pattern 10 is ended. (One game ends).

In addition, the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" constitutes a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the display of the "specific image" constitutes a "suggestion notification effect" that makes it anticipated that the suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") will be executed.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 33, the display of the "specific image" is easier to display when you lose than when you win a jackpot. Therefore, the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" after the display of the "specific image" can be said to be a specific suggestive performance that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is low. Furthermore, the display of the "specific image" can be said to be a specific suggestion notification effect that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is low.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 10 (a) in FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 10 using the animation of FIG. 54.
FIG. 54 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable production pattern 10)
(a) T0 to T1 correspond to the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
After that, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and only the middle performance pattern 38b is scrolled in the vertical direction.

(a) T1 to T2 correspond to the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left performance symbol 38a and the right performance symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" (the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol) appears from the top of the screen as the middle performance symbol 38b.
Further, a character image 31l is displayed, and a character image "Continue!" (corresponding to a speech preview effect) is emitted from the character image 31l, which suggests that the pseudo series will continue.

(a) T2 to T3 correspond to the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left performance symbol 38a and the right performance symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" appearing from the top of the screen is temporarily stopped (or may be determined to be stopped) in the center of the screen.

(a) T3 to T4 correspond to "continuous performance".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT pattern 31m" in the center of the screen, and a pseudo continuous number is displayed in the upper right of the display area. ``Pseudo consecutive number image 31n'' indicating ``x2'' is displayed.
Furthermore, at this time, the sound effect "Jakeen!" is outputted from the audio output device 32 as a pseudo continuous continuous effect.

(a) T4 to T5 correspond to the "pseudo series 2 fluctuation period".
That is, by simply adding the "pseudo continuous number image 31n" of "x2" to the display contents indicated by (a) T0 to T1, it visually appears as if a new variable performance has started.

(a) T6 to T7 correspond to the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left performance pattern 38a and the right performance pattern 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT pattern 31m" appearing from the top of the screen is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the screen.

(a) T7 to T8 correspond to "continuous performance".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT pattern 31m" in the center of the screen, and a pseudo continuous number is displayed in the upper right of the display area. A "pseudo-repeat number image 31n" indicating "x3" is displayed.
Furthermore, at this time, the sound effect "Jakeen!" is outputted from the audio output device 32 as a pseudo continuous continuous effect.

The variable effect pattern 10 with pseudo-association has the above-mentioned display mode.
In addition, the "pseudo consecutive fluctuation period" of the "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period" and the "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period" constitute a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the "pseudo continuous notification period" of the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period" and the "pseudo continuous 3 notification period" are A ``suggestion notification performance'' that makes the user anticipate that the ``period'' will be executed is constructed.

Although the time chart does not particularly indicate the time relationship, the time from the "Pseudo-Ren 2 notification period" to the "Pseudo-Ren 2 fluctuation period" (in other words, the time from the "First Suggestion Notification Performance" to the "Pseudo-Ren 2 Variation Period") The time from the display of the "specific image" to the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" (in other words, the time from the "second suggestion notification effect" to the "first suggestion presentation") is It consists of a long time compared to the time up to the "second suggestive performance").
In addition, the performance execution time of the "pseudo series 2 notification period" and the "pseudo series 2 fluctuation period" is the production execution time between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period". (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "relationship of performance execution time").
As a result, for example, in the "first suggestion notification performance" to "first suggestion performance" that are performed before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to maintain expectations for a jackpot for a long time. .
On the other hand, for example, in the "second suggestion notification performance" to "second suggestion performance" performed after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the suggestion that is expected to be immediately executed in the suggestion notification performance is By executing the performance, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for a jackpot from increasing.
Note that the relationship between the times is not limited to this, and the two may be equal in time, or may be in a reverse relationship.

Returning to the explanation of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is a variation effect pattern 5, and timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and the "line preview production" are continued until timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the dialogue preview effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, the "normal variation image" and the image "Reach!" that notifies the execution of the reach effect in advance are displayed on the "image display device."
These aspects of the "image display device" and "speech preview performance" continue until timing (b) T2, and then, when reaching timing (b) T3, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "line preview performance" is not executed.
Note that the description of the subsequent contents of the variable effect pattern 5 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 5 (b) of FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 5 using the animation of FIG. 55.
FIG. 55 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 5)
(b) T0 to T1 correspond to before the execution of the dialogue preview performance in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
After that, in (b) T1 to T2, the character image 31l is displayed, and the character image 31l displays (utters) a line image saying "Reach!" which informs in advance of the execution of the reach effect.

Then, from (b) T2 to T3, the left production symbol 38a (5 symbols) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and furthermore, from (b) T3, the right production symbol 38c (5 symbols) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the 5 symbols Normal reach performance is executed.

In the variable effect pattern 5, the display mode is as described above.
In addition, the "normal reach fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, in the "Speech Preview Performance", the dialogue image that announces the execution of the reach performance in advance (the dialogue image "It's reach!") is a "speech image that announces the execution of the reach performance" in advance, and the dialogue image that announces the execution of the reach performance in advance (the dialogue image that says "Reach!") is " It constitutes a "suggestive and informative performance".
In addition, even when the "line preview performance" is executed in the variable performance pattern 10, the above-mentioned "performance execution time 'relationship' applies.

Returning to the explanation of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "roulette notice effect" can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and "roulette preview performance" are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the roulette preview effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, a "roulette effect image" (a roulette effect image in which a plurality of options are displayed) is displayed on the "image display device." Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect of selecting one of the plurality of options is performed.
These aspects of the "image display device" and the "roulette preview performance" continue until timing (c) T2, and then, when reaching timing (c) T3, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
From then on, at timing (c) T4, the transition is to "background switching", and at timing (c) T5, the transition is to "SP reach variation period", and the corresponding images are displayed on the "image display device". be done.
Note that the description of the subsequent contents of the variable effect pattern 7 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 7 (c) in FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 7 using the animation of FIG. 56.
FIG. 56 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 etc., the explanation will be omitted.

(Display example in variable production pattern 7)
(c) T0 to T1 correspond to before the execution of the roulette preview performance in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
After that, in (c) T1 to T2, the roulette effect image 31o is displayed and corresponds to the roulette pattern 1 (see FIG. 37) of "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow". options will be displayed.
Then, a performance is performed to select one of the options (a performance such as rotationally moving the selection cursor image), and the performance is continued for a predetermined period of time.
Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the screen becomes dark except for one option, to notify that one option has been selected.
Note that in FIG. 56, it is assumed that "SP" is selected.

(c) T3 to T4 indicate a "normal reach variation period", and (c) T4 to T5 indicate a "background switching", and a switching image (an image called "Development!") is displayed.
In addition, in (c) T4 to T5, the background image imitating a mountain corresponding to the "Normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, and other than the text image "Development!", a whiteout image is displayed. There is.
And (c) T5~ indicates the "SP reach fluctuation period". In the "SP Reach Variation Period", the background image imitating a mountain corresponding to the "Normal Reach Variation Period" is not displayed, but a text image that says "SP Reach!" and an image that looks like character images confronting each other are displayed. be done.

In the variable effect pattern 7, the display mode is as described above.
In addition, the "SP reach variation period" constitutes a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the selection of an option in the "roulette preview performance" (in the example of FIG. 56, the selection of "SP") is a "suggestion" that anticipates that the relevant suggestion performance ("SP reach fluctuation period") will be executed. It constitutes a "notification performance".
Furthermore, even when the "roulette notice performance" is executed in the variable performance pattern 10, the above-mentioned "performance execution time" is 'relationship' applies.

Returning to the explanation of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (d) T0)
(d) is a variable effect pattern 33, and timing (d) T0 is the timing at which the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Furthermore, at this timing, the "SU preview performance" can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and "SU preview performance" are continued until timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
Timing (d) T1 is the timing at which the SU preview effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, the "SU preview effect image" is displayed on the "image display device". In addition, in FIG. 52, it is assumed that "probable SU5" is finally displayed. Therefore, the display is switched in order such as "SU1" → "SU2" → "SU3" → "SU4" → "SU5" → "Probable SU5" for a predetermined period of time.
These aspects of the "image display device" and "SU preview performance" continue until timing (d) T2, and then, when reaching timing (d) T3, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is the timing when the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" begins.
Note that from then on, at timing (d) T4, the period shifts to "full rotation fluctuation period", at timing (c) T5, shifts to "temporary stop display period", and at timing (c) T6, shifts to "determined stop display period". The corresponding images are displayed on the "image display device".
Note that detailed explanation of the variable effect pattern 33 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of the variable effect pattern 33 (d) in FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 33 using the animation of FIG. 57.
FIG. 57 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable performance pattern 33)
(d) T0 to T1 correspond to before the execution of the SU notice performance in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.
Thereafter, from (d) T1 onwards, a step-up preview performance image 31p is displayed, and from (d) to T2, a step-up preview performance image 31p of "probable SU5 full rotation" is displayed.
Further, in conjunction with the display of the step-up preview performance image 31p "SU5 guaranteed to be a full rotation", the audio output device 32 outputs a notification sound (Kyuin! Kyuin!) that notifies that the fluctuation is a jackpot.

(d) T4 to T5 indicate the "total rotation fluctuation period". In the "full rotation variation period", the left presentation pattern 38a, the middle presentation pattern 38b, and the right presentation pattern 38c are vertically scrolled and displayed in the same pattern.
Then, at (d) T5 to T6, the left performance symbol 38a (7 symbols), middle performance symbol 38b (7 symbols), and right performance symbol 38c (7 symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed, and (d) from T6 to T7, The left performance symbol 38a (7 symbols), the middle performance symbol 38b (7 symbols), and the right performance symbol 38c (7 symbols) are fixedly displayed.

The variable effect pattern 33 has a display mode as described above.
In addition, the "total rotation fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestive performance" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the display of the step-up preview performance image 31p in the "SU preview performance" (in the example of FIG. 56, the display of "probable SU5 full rotation") is executed when the relevant suggestion performance ("full rotation fluctuation period") is displayed. Construct a ``suggestive notification effect'' that makes you anticipate what will happen.
In addition, even when the "SU notice performance" is executed in the variable performance pattern 10, the above-mentioned "performance execution time 'relationship' applies.

Above, (a) variable effect pattern 10, (b) variable effect pattern 5, (c) variable effect pattern 7, and (d) variable effect pattern 33 have been described as examples. According to them, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, the "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)), the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, the "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)) It is characterized by a greater number of executable suggestive effects than later versions (Hochi).
Also, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)), the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)) It is characterized by a larger number of executable suggestion announcements than later versions.
That is, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)),
A production (pseudo series 2 Direction, pseudo-ren 3 direction),
In the "Speech Preview Production", a production (Speech) based on a combination of a dialogue image (a dialogue image that says "Reach!") (suggestion notification production) that notifies the execution of the reach production in advance, and a "Normal reach fluctuation period" (suggestion production). preview performance and normal reach performance),
In the "roulette preview performance", the selection of options (in the example of Fig. 56, the selection of "SP") (suggestive notification performance) and the "SP reach fluctuation period" (suggestive performance) (roulette preview performance) production and roulette compatible production),
Display of the step-up preview performance image 31p in the "SU preview performance" (in the example shown in Fig. 56, the display reads "Probable SU5 full rotation") (suggestive notification performance) and "Full rotation fluctuation period" (suggestive performance) Production in combination with (SU preview production and SU compatible production),
is feasible, while
After the timing to notify the result of jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)),
A performance (background switching performance and temporary stop display performance) based on a combination of the display of a "specific image" (suggestive notification performance) and the temporary stop display (suggestive performance) of the performance pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period";
is feasible.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to improve expectations for the jackpot through a plurality of types of suggestion notification performances and suggestion performances.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

In this way, before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination, the number of executable suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects is larger than after the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination. Before the timing of notification, depending on the execution level of the preview performance, a performance based on a combination of the first suggestion notification performance and the first suggestion performance (for example, a pseudo-sequence 2 performance, a pseudo-sequence 3 performance), and a second It is possible to perform a combination of a suggestion notification performance and a second suggestion performance (for example, a line preview performance and a normal reach performance), and after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the third suggestion notification performance is executed. (Display of specific image 31e) and third suggestive effect (temporary stop display of effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") It is possible to perform the effect (background switching effect and temporary stop display effect). I can say that.

Note that this is not limited to this form, and the number of executable suggestion notification performances and suggestion performances may be the same before and after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, or the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination may be the same. The number of executable suggestion notification performances and suggestion performances may be greater after , than before.

In addition, as shown in the example of (a) variable performance pattern 10 in FIG. 52, for example, during the "pseudo continuous 2 notification period", other preview performances (for example, "line preview performance") are simultaneously executed. However, for example, when displaying a "specific image," other preview effects (for example, "line preview effects") cannot be executed at the same time.
In other words, when executing the first suggestion notification effect ("Pseudo 2nd notification period"), the preview effect can be executed, and when executing the second suggestion notification effect (displaying "specific image"), the preview effect can be executed. , it can be said that the preview performance is not executed.
Thereby, in a situation where expectations for a jackpot are to be improved, by simultaneously executing other preview effects, it is possible to further improve expectations for a jackpot.
In addition, in the aspect of preventing excessive expectations for a jackpot from increasing, by not simultaneously executing other preview performances, it is possible to maintain prevention of increasing excessive expectations for a jackpot.

FIG. 53 is a drawing that extracts a part of the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33, and particularly shows (a) the relationship between the number of pseudo consecutive runs for each variable effect pattern and the degree of appearance of a specific image (when a loss occurs), and (b) the relationship between It shows the relationship between the time and the degree of appearance of a specific image when hitting a jackpot.
In addition, in FIG. 53, the variation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive runs is set to one is visually as if two variations are being performed, for example, normal variation → pseudo consecutive success → normal variation. , it becomes a "pseudo-ren 2 performance." In addition, a variation performance pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive runs is determined to be 2 times, for example, normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal variation → pseudo consecutive success → normal reach variation, looks as if the variation is performed 3 times. Therefore, it is a ``pseudo continuous 3 performance''. In addition, a variation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive runs is determined to be 3 times, for example, normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal variation → pseudo continuous success → normal variation → pseudo consecutive success → normal reach variation, looks as if it were a normal reach variation. Since there are four variations, this is a "pseudo series of four effects."
Further, as shown in FIG. 33, in the variable performance pattern for the jackpot, "Pseudo consecutive 2 performance", "Pseudo consecutive 3 performance", and "Pseudo consecutive 4 performance" are similarly executable.
Note that the executable pseudo-sequence effects are not limited to this, and may further include a "pseudo-sequence 5 effect" or a "pseudo-sequence 6 effect".

(a) shows the relationship between the number of pseudo-runs and the degree of appearance of a specific image for each variable effect pattern (at the time of loss), and shows an excerpt of the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-run is executed in case of a loss. Among these, the only variable effect pattern that does not involve displaying a "specific image" is variable effect pattern 3, and the other variable effect patterns are variable effect patterns that involve displaying a "specific image."
For example, when comparing variable effect pattern 3 with other variable effect patterns, the variable effect pattern in which a large number of pseudo consecutive runs is defined makes it easier to display a "specific image." This is because the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the easier it is to move beyond SP reach, so it becomes easier for a "specific image" to be displayed depending on the situation, and the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation for a jackpot. This is because after the loss notification is performed, it is necessary to clearly notify that the reach effect has ended as a loss, so the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed.

In addition, when a pseudo continuous notice is given, the specific image 31e may be displayed regardless of the number of times, or the specific image 31e may be displayed in a variable effect pattern in which a large number of pseudo consecutive notices is specified. You can make it difficult.

(b) shows the relationship between the degree of appearance of a specific image during a loss and a jackpot, and is an excerpt of a variable performance pattern accompanied by the display of a "specific image." As mentioned above, the variable effect pattern 30 is the only variable effect pattern that involves the display of a "specific image" at the time of a jackpot, and even from the distribution ratio in FIG. Since the effect pattern 30 is rarely selected, the variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of a "specific image" tends to appear more easily when there is a loss than when there is a jackpot.
This makes it easier for players to recognize that the display of the "specific image" = the result of the jackpot determination was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reach effect has ended in a loss. It can be made easier.

Note that the variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of a "specific image" may be made to appear more easily when there is a jackpot than when there is a loss.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 52 to 57 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

(Summary of Figures 52 to 57)
That is, FIGS. 52 to 57 have the following features.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the stop display period);
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
The number of executable suggestion notification performances and suggestion performances differs before and after the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52(a)) of notifying the result of the jackpot determination.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the expectation for the jackpot can be improved by the suggestion notification performance and the suggestion production.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first performance based on a combination of the first suggestion notification performance and the first suggestion performance (for example, a pseudo continuous 2 performance, It is possible to perform a second performance (for example, a line preview performance and a normal reach performance) that is a combination of the second suggestion notification performance and the second suggestion performance (pseudo series 3 performance).
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → third suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and third suggestion effect (for example, "Temporary stop") A third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be performed in combination with the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "display period".
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the expectation for the jackpot can be improved by the suggestion notification performance and the suggestion production.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the stop display period);
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") and the first suggestion performance (for example, " ``Pseudo-Run 2 Fluctuation Period'') may be executed.
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestion effect (for example, "Temporary stop") "Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the display period" may be executed.
When executing the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") -> advance notice performance (for example, dialogue notice performance) can be executed.
When executing the second suggestion notification effect (for example, displaying the specific image 31e) → the preview effect (for example, dialogue preview effect) is not executed.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, in a situation where expectations for a jackpot are to be improved, by simultaneously executing other preview effects, it is possible to further improve expectations for a jackpot.
In addition, in the aspect of preventing excessive expectations for a jackpot from increasing, by not simultaneously executing other preview performances, it is possible to maintain prevention of increasing excessive expectations for a jackpot.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the stop display period);
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") and the first suggestion performance (for example, " A first effect (e.g., pseudo sequence 2 performance) in combination with a ``pseudo sequence 2 execution period''), a second suggestion notification performance (for example, ``pseudo sequence 3 notification period''), and a second suggestion performance (for example, It is possible to perform a second effect (for example, a pseudo-sequence 3 effect) in combination with the "pseudo-sequence 3 execution period").
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → third suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and third suggestion effect (for example, "Temporary stop") A third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be performed in combination with the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "display period".
The ratio of performing the first performance and the third performance is different from the ratio of performing the first performance, the second performance, and the third performance (for example, the variable performance patterns 3, 9, 14 in FIG. 53, In the case of 1 pseudo-series number 15 (pseudo-sequence 2 effect), the pseudo-sequence may be executed but the specific image 31e may not be displayed, as in variable effect pattern 3, but in variable effect patterns 10 to 12, 16 to 18 Since the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable effect patterns when the pseudo continuous number of times is 2 (pseudo continuous 3 effects), it is better to execute only the first effect when the first effect and the second effect are executed. (The rate at which the third effect is executed is higher than in the case where the third effect is executed.)
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, even if the content of the performance becomes complicated due to the execution of SP reach, etc., it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a loss.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo series 2 notification period", "pseudo series 3 notification period") and It is possible to perform a first effect (for example, a pseudo-sequence 2 effect, a pseudo-sequence 3 effect) in combination with a first suggestive effect (for example, "pseudo-sequence 2 execution period", "pseudo-sequence 3 execution period").
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestion effect (for example, background switching effect) It is possible to perform a second effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) in combination with the second effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect).
The ratio of executing the first performance and the second performance when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss is different from the ratio of executing the first performance and the second performance when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (for example, , FIG. 53, variable performance patterns 7 to 18 are variable performance patterns that display a specific image 31e when there is a loss, and variable performance pattern 30 is a variable performance pattern that displays a specific image 31e when there is a jackpot. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a jackpot).
It has such characteristics.
This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the display of the "specific image" = the result of the jackpot determination was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reach effect ended in a loss. It can be made easier.

That is,
In the variable performance,
Suggestive effects according to the result of the jackpot judgment (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", "Temporary reach fluctuation period") Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the stop display period);
Suggestive notification effects that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion effect will be executed (for example, ``Pseudo-Run 2 notification period'', ``Pseudo-Run 3 notification period'', the line image ``Reach!'' in ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette Selecting an option in "Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of the “specific image 31e”).
Before the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → the first suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 notification period") and the first suggestion performance (for example, " It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a pseudo-sequence 2 performance) consisting of a "pseudo-sequence 2 variable period").
After the predetermined timing (for example, T12 in FIG. 52 (a)) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestion effect (for example, "Temporary stop") It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a background switching performance and a temporary stop display performance) (temporary stop display of the performance pattern 38 during the display period).
Also, the execution times of the above effects are different.
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, for example, in the "first suggestion notification performance" to "first suggestion performance" that are performed before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to maintain expectations for the jackpot.
On the other hand, for example, in the "second suggestion notification performance" to "second suggestion performance" that are performed after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing. can.

Next, the fourth characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 58 to 61.
Note that in Figures 58 to 61, there are some things that are omitted because they mainly refer to the pattern stimulation effect, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 and those described in Figures 47 to 51 are omitted. The contents described above and the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57 can be used in appropriate combinations.

FIG. 58(a) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 (when normal reach is lost), and the table is stored in, for example, the sub-ROM 120b. For example, the sub CPU 120a determines that the stop special symbol data indicated by the effect pattern designation command is "00" and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is "00" based on the received effect pattern designation command and variation pattern specification command. If it is "variation pattern 4", it is determined which presentation pattern 38 is used to perform the ready-to-reach presentation and to make it a loss by referring to the table shown in FIG. 58(a) for normal reach loss.

As shown in Figure 58(a), the distribution ratio for "1 symbol" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "2 symbols" is "20%", and the distribution ratio for "3 symbols" is "20%". The distribution ratio for ``Design'' is ``5%'', the distribution rate for ``4 symbols'' is ``15%'', and the distribution rate for ``5 symbols'' is ``10%''. For "6 symbols", the distribution ratio is "15%", for "7 symbols", the distribution ratio is not selected, and for "8 symbols", the distribution ratio is "15%". The distribution ratio for the "9 symbols" is "15%", and the distribution ratio is "10%".

FIG. 58(b) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 (when SP reach or higher is lost), and the table is stored in, for example, the sub ROM 120b. For example, the sub CPU 120a determines that the stop special symbol data indicated by the effect pattern designation command is "00" and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is "00" based on the received effect pattern designation command and variation pattern specification command. If it is one of the "variation patterns 5 to 10", refer to the table shown in FIG. 58(b) for SP reach or higher loss, and determine which effect pattern 38 should be used to perform the reach effect and make it a loss. decide.

As shown in Figure 58(b), the distribution ratio for "1 symbol" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "2 symbols" is "15%", and the distribution ratio for "3 symbols" is "10%". The distribution ratio for ``Design'' is ``9%'', the distribution rate for ``4 symbols'' is ``15%'', and the distribution rate for ``5 symbols'' is ``10%''. The distribution ratio for "6 symbols" is "15%", the distribution ratio for "7 symbols" is "1%", and the "8 symbols" has a distribution percentage of "15%". The allocation ratio is "15%", and the allocation ratio for "9 symbols" is "10%".

For example, in the case of a loss, the normal reach with "7 symbols" will not be executed, but there is a possibility that SP reach or higher with "7 symbols" will be executed, so if it becomes reach state with "7 symbols", it will always be SP reach or higher. will be held.
In addition, if you lose with SP reach or higher, a "specific image" will be displayed as shown in Figure 33, so if you reach the reach state with "7 symbols", SP reach or higher will always occur and you will definitely get a specific image. It can be said that it involves displaying an image.

On the other hand, for example, in the case of a loss, if it becomes a reach state with "6 symbols", there is a possibility of either "normal reach" or "SP or more reach". In other words, in the case of "6 symbols", there are cases where the game ends with "normal reach" and the "specific image" is not displayed, and cases where "SP or more reach" is executed and the "specific image" is displayed. .

In other words, in the case of a loss, when it becomes a reach state with "6 symbols" and when it becomes a reach state with "7 symbols", the "7 symbols" always involve the display of a "specific image". , "specific images" tend to be more likely to be displayed.
Note that the distribution in FIG. 58 can be changed as appropriate according to the trend. For example, "7 symbols" may be selected when the normal reach is lost.

Here, in order to make it easier to understand FIG. 58, the display formats are shown for (a) a ready-to-reach state with "6 symbols" and (b) a ready-to-reach state with "7 symbols". A supplementary explanation will be given using the animation of 59.
FIG. 59 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 etc., description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in FIG. 59, the temporary stop display is omitted.

(a) is a case where the reach state is reached with "6 symbols", and in this case, as shown in (N1), there is a case where the normal reach is lost (no specific image 31e is displayed), and (SP1-1) As shown in , there are cases where you lose more than SP reach. If the loss is equal to or greater than SP reach, a specific image 31e is displayed as shown in (SP1-2).

(b) is a case where the player becomes a reach state with "7 symbols", and in this case, there is only a case where the player loses more than SP reach. That is, as shown in (SP1-2), there are only cases where the specific image 31e is displayed.
Therefore, in the case of a loss, when it becomes a reach state with "6 symbols" and when it becomes a reach state with "7 symbols", the "7 symbols" always involve the display of a "specific image". , "specific images" tend to be more likely to be displayed.

FIG. 60(a) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 when the symbol is successfully incited, and the table is stored in, for example, the sub-ROM 120b. For example, the sub CPU 120a determines one of "variable performance pattern 8", "variable performance pattern 20", and "variable performance pattern 27" (a variable performance pattern whose performance structure includes a symbol inciting success) as the variable performance pattern. In this case, with reference to the table shown in FIG. 60(a) showing the distribution of the production symbols 38 when the symbol promotion is successful, it is determined which production symbol 38 should be used to perform the symbol promotion and reach the reach state. .

As shown in Figure 60(a), the distribution ratio for "1 symbol" is "12%", the distribution ratio for "2 symbols" is "12%", and the distribution ratio is "3". The distribution ratio for ``Design'' is ``12%'', the distribution rate for ``4 symbols'' is ``12%'', and the distribution rate for ``5 symbols'' is ``12%''. The distribution ratio for "6 symbols" is "12%", the distribution ratio for "7 symbols" is "4%", and the "8 symbols" has a distribution percentage of "12%". The distribution ratio is "12%", and the distribution ratio for "9 symbols" is "12%".

FIG. 60(b) is a table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 when the symbol invocation fails, and the table is stored in, for example, the sub-ROM 120b. For example, when the sub CPU 120a determines "variable performance pattern 2" (a variable performance pattern whose performance configuration includes a symbol inciting failure) as the fluctuating performance pattern, the sub CPU 120a determines the performance symbol when the symbol inciting fails as shown in FIG. 60(b). With reference to a table showing the distribution of 38, it is determined which production pattern 38 is to be used to stimulate the pattern.

As shown in Figure 60(b), the distribution ratio for "1 symbol" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "2 symbols" is "10%", and the distribution ratio is "3". The distribution ratio for "Symbols" is "10%", the distribution ratio for "4 symbols" is "10%", and the distribution ratio for "5 symbols" is "10%". For "6 symbols", the distribution percentage is "10%", for "7 symbols", the distribution percentage is "20%", and for "8 symbols", the distribution percentage is "10%". The distribution ratio is "10%", and the distribution ratio for "9 symbols" is "10%".

In other words, the "7 symbols" tend to cause a symbol inversion failure to occur more easily and a symbol inversion success to occur less easily than other symbols. For example, in the case of "6 symbols", a successful symbol inciting is more likely to occur than in the case of "7 symbols", and a ready-to-reach state is more likely to be formed when a symbol inciting effect occurs.
Further, the variable performance pattern in which a symbol is successfully inflated when a loss is made is "Variable performance pattern 8", and the "Variable performance pattern 8" is a variable performance pattern accompanied by the display of a specific image.
Therefore, when a symbol inciting effect using "6 symbols" occurs, there is a higher possibility that "variable effect pattern 8" is executed compared to when a symbol inciting effect using "7 symbols" occurs. There is a tendency that a specific image is more likely to be displayed.
Note that the distribution in FIG. 60 can be changed as appropriate according to the trend. For example, the "7 symbol" may be selected equally with other symbols, or the "7 symbol" may be selected more easily than other symbols when a symbol is successfully stimulated, and when a symbol is a failure, other symbols may be selected evenly. It may be made more difficult to select than the symbol.
Further, the "odd number symbols" may be made easier to select than the "even symbols" when the symbols are successfully flipped, and may be made more difficult to select than the "even symbols" when the symbols are unsuccessful. Moreover, the relationship between the "even symbols" and the "odd symbols" may be reversed.

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of FIG. 60, a display example of a symbol inciting failure with "7 symbols" and a display example of a symbol inciting success with "7 symbols" will be supplementarily explained using FIG. 61.
FIG. 61 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in FIG. 61, the temporary stop display is omitted.

In the case of symbol inciting failure, in (a), "7 symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left presentation symbol 38a, and "7 symbol" is displayed as the right presentation symbol 38c slowly descending from the top of the screen toward the temporary stop display position. This prompts whether or not the vehicle will stop at the temporary stop display position. At this time, the sound output device 32 also outputs a sound effect of "gogogo♪" to incite whether or not the "7 symbol" of the right performance symbol 38c will stop at the temporary stop display position.

Then, in (b), the sound effect changes (changes to a sound effect of "Gowan♪") to further incite whether or not the "7 symbol" of the right presentation symbol 38c will stop at the temporary stop display position. Furthermore, as described in FIG. 58, the "7 symbol" is more difficult to be selected in the event of a loss than the SP reach, so when the "7 symbol" reaches the reach state, the expectation level for a jackpot is considerably improved. Therefore, when a symbol is positioned in this way, the symbol inciting performance is an effective performance in improving the game's interest.

Then, in (c), a sound effect such as ``suk'' is output from the audio output device 32, and at the same time, a state in which the ``7 pattern'' of the right effect pattern 38c has moved downward on the screen is displayed. That is, the same symbol as "7 symbol" as the left performance symbol 38a was not temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position as the right performance symbol 38c, that is, it indicates that the symbol promotion has failed.

Then, in (d), the "8 symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the ready-to-win state has not been reached.

Next, in the case of a successful symbol inciting, (a) and (b) are the same as in the case of a unsuccessful symbol inciting, but in (c), a sound effect such as "Kakeen♪" is output from the audio output device 32, and at the same time, This shows that the "7 symbol" of the right performance symbol 38c has been temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position, that is, the symbol has been successfully stimulated. Then, in (d), the "7 symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 58 to 61 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

(Summary of Figures 58 to 61)
That is, FIGS. 58 to 61 have the following features.

That is,
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
A reach effect (fluctuating effect pattern) using a first specific symbol (for example, the 6-symbol effect pattern 38) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, and a second specific symbol (for example, The execution rate is different from the reach effect (variable effect pattern) using the 6-symbol effect pattern 38) (for example, if the jackpot judgment process is a loss, the 6-symbol is selected even during normal reach, so the specific image 31e may not be displayed, but the specific image 31e is displayed because the 7th symbol is selected only when it is SP reach or higher.Therefore, if the 6th symbol is a reach, and the 7th symbol is a reach. (The ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs depending on the case where the specific image 31e is displayed.)
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, the display ratio of the specific image differs depending on the pattern (effect pattern 38), so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

That is,
Using the first specific symbol (for example, the 6-symbol production pattern 38), the first suggestion effect to determine whether or not to make it a reach effect (for example, a pattern inciting effect that incites whether or not to make it a reach effect with 6 symbols) If you run
Using the second specific symbol (for example, the 7 symbol production symbol 38), a second suggestion production to determine whether or not to make it a reach effect (for example, a symbol stimulation effect that incites whether or not to make it a reach effect by the 7 symbol) There are cases where this is executed.
A variable performance (fluctuating performance pattern) in which a first suggestion performance is executed and then a reach performance is executed, which involves displaying a specific image 31e; and a second suggestion performance is executed, which is accompanied by a display of a specific image 31e. Variable effects (fluctuating effects patterns) that execute reach effects have different execution rates (for example, 6 symbols are more likely to succeed in a pattern incitement effect than 7 patterns, and 7 symbols are more likely to succeed in a pattern incitement effect than 6 patterns). Therefore, the 6 symbol is more likely to become a reach than the 7 symbol, and since it is easier to become a reach, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed, and the symbol agitation effect that incites whether or not the 6 symbol is a reach, and the 7 symbol. The rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs depending on the pattern promotion effect that incites whether or not it is a reach with the pattern).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, the display ratio of the specific image differs depending on the symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, the fifth characteristic portion related to the specific image will be explained using FIGS. 62 to 67.
Note that some descriptions are omitted in Figures 62 to 67 because they mainly refer to operation promotion images, but the contents described in Figures 42 to 46 and Figures 47 to 51 may be omitted. The contents described above, the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57, and the contents described in FIGS. 58 to 61 can be used in appropriate combinations.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the operation promotion image in this embodiment.
FIG. 62 shows only the image display device 31 extracted and described, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as described in FIG. 43 and the like, description thereof will be omitted.

The "first operation promotion image" refers to an operation promotion image corresponding to a non-protruding state of the production button 35, as shown by 31q. Therefore, even in the operation promotion image, an image showing that the object does not protrude upward is displayed.
The "second operation promotion image" refers to an operation promotion image corresponding to the protruding state of the production button 35, as shown by 31r. Therefore, also in the operation promotion image, an image showing an upwardly protruding state is displayed.

Note that (a) to (e) show the flow from displaying the operation promotion image to final stop display, and in particular, (c) shows that the specific image 31e has been displayed.
That is, the specific image 31e can be displayed both in the variable effect in which the first operation promotion image 31q is displayed and in the variable effect in which the second operation promotion image 31r is displayed, and the common specific image 31e is displayed. It turns out.
As a result, even if the second operation promotion image 31r is displayed as a variable effect, it does not mean that a special specific image 31e is displayed. Also, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a loss.
Furthermore, it is no longer necessary to prepare specific images 31e for the first operation promotion image 31q and for the second operation promotion image 31r, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

In addition, in FIG. 62, an image in which the production button 35 is in a non-protruding state and an image in which the production button 35 is in a protruding state are used as examples of the "first operation promotion image" and the "second operation promotion image". As described above, any mode may be used as long as the "first operation promotion image" and the "second operation promotion image" have different expectations for a jackpot.
For example, in a gaming machine in which the effect button 35 is not in a protruding state, an image in which the effect button 35 is in a non-protruding state and in a normal color (for example, blue) is set as a "first operation promotion image" and the effect button 35 is An image in which the image is in a non-protruding state and has a color different from the normal color (for example, red) may be applied as the "second operation promotion image".
In addition, in a gaming machine that has another operation means (the above-mentioned production lever) in addition to the production button 35, the image corresponding to the production button 35 is set as a "first operation promotion image", and the other operation means ( The image corresponding to the above-mentioned production lever) may be applied as the "second operation promotion image".

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, displayable operation promotion images and executable timings for each variable performance pattern in the event of a loss will be described.
Note that the word "determined" in the corresponding performance corresponds to the notification period (for example, in FIG. 42, from (c) T4 to (c) T5) for notifying the result of the jackpot determination.
That is, during the notification period for notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the jackpot determination can be notified by having the player operate the performance button 35 (if not operated, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed).
Note that in the following, "decision" may be referred to as "decision performance."
In addition, the "decision performance" is one in which the player operates the performance button 35 (if the player does not operate it, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed) and the result of the jackpot determination is notified, and the other in which the player operates the performance button 35. The system may be capable of both notifying the results of the jackpot determination and notifying the results of the jackpot determination, or it may be capable of performing only one of them.

For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 1, the first operation promotion image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the start time of variation is defined as the executable timing. Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance is defined as a corresponding performance.
That is, in the case of the variation performance pattern 1, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, and when the performance button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

For example, in the case of variation production pattern 7, the first operation promotion image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the executable timing is defined as the start of variation and SP reach time. . Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of variation production pattern 7, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of variation, and when the production button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview production is executed, and at the time of the final production, the first operation promotion image is displayed again. is displayed, indicating that if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.

For example, in the case of variation performance pattern 12, a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion image are defined as displayable (executable) operation promotion images, and executable timings include the start of variation and SP reach. The time is stipulated. Furthermore, a line preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of the variation performance pattern 12, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, when the production button 35 is operated, the line preview performance is executed, and at the time of the final performance, the second operation promotion image is displayed. This indicates that if the player operates the performance button 35, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.

For example, in the case of variation effect pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the executable timings include the start of variation, SP reach, and SPSP reach. stipulated. Furthermore, a dialogue preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of the variable performance pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and if the performance button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview performance is executed, and at the time of the final performance at SP reach, the first operation promotion image is displayed again. When the 1-operation promotion image is displayed and you operate the performance button 35, you will be notified of the result of the jackpot judgment (in this case, a draw performance will occur and it will develop into SPSP reach), and at the time of the decisive performance at SPSP reach, you will be notified of the result of the jackpot judgment. , the first operation promotion image is displayed, indicating that if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.

For example, in the variation production pattern 18, a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion image are defined as displayable (executable) operation promotion images, and executable timings include the start of variation and the SPSP reach. The time is stipulated. Furthermore, a line preview performance and a final performance are defined as corresponding performances.
That is, in the case of the variation production pattern 18, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of variation, and when the production button 35 is operated, the dialogue preview production is executed, and at the time of the final production at SPSP reach, the second operation is displayed. The promotion image is displayed, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination will be notified.
Note that the same applies to other variable effect patterns, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Further, the corresponding performance is not limited to the dialogue preview performance or the final performance, but other performances may be applied as long as the performance involves operation of the performance button 35.

That is, the losing variation performance pattern includes a variation performance pattern that involves displaying the first operation promotion image during the variation performance, a variation performance pattern that involves displaying the first operation promotion image a plurality of times, and a variation performance pattern that involves displaying the first operation promotion image a plurality of times, and a first operation promotion image. and a variable effect pattern accompanied by display of a second operation promotion image.
Furthermore, during the variable performance, the variable performance patterns that involve the display of the first operation promotion image at least once (variable performance patterns 1 to 3, 5 to 18) include the variable performance patterns that involve the display of a specific image (variable performance pattern 7). ~18) and variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 1 to 3, 5, and 6) that do not involve the display of a specific image, while variations that involve the display of a second operation promotion image during the variable effect The effects (fluctuating effects patterns 12, 18) include only variable effects patterns (fluctuating effects patterns 12, 18) accompanied by the display of a specific image. That is, when the second operation promotion image is displayed during the variable performance, there is no possibility that the specific image will not be displayed.
As a result, even if a loss is reported with the display of the second operation promotion image, by displaying the specific image, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended in a loss.

Next, using FIG. 64, the correspondence relationship between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image for SP reach or higher (at the time of loss) will be explained.
FIG. 64(a) is an excerpt of the fluctuation performance patterns (variation performance patterns 7 to 18) of losses that are greater than or equal to the SP reach of losses.
That is, all of the variable effect patterns are variable effect patterns that involve displaying a specific image.

(a) shows the correspondence between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image for SP reach or higher (at the time of loss), and shows the relationship with the operation promotion image displayed in the final performance in each variable performance pattern. It shows.
That is, in the first operation promotion image, variable effect patterns 7 to 11 and 13 to 17 are defined, whereas in the second operation promotion image, variable effect patterns 12 and 18 are defined. In addition, the variable performance pattern 12 has a distribution ratio of "10%" when the fluctuation pattern 7 is determined, and the fluctuation performance pattern 18 has a distribution ratio of "10%" when the fluctuation pattern 10 is determined. ”, it can be said that this is a variable production pattern that is difficult to select.

(b) shows a comparison of the appearance rates of the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image of SP reach or higher (loss); for example, the operation promotion image displayed in the decisive performance is the first operation promotion image In the variable effect pattern, the overall distribution is "580/600", whereas in the variable effect pattern in which the operation promotion image displayed in the fixed effect is the second operation promotion image, the overall distribution is "580/600". is "20/600". That is, the appearance rate when SP reach or higher misses is "29/30" for the first operation promotion image and "1/30" for the second operation promotion image. In other words, when SP reach or more is lost, the first operation promotion image is more likely to be displayed than the second operation promotion image in the deciding performance.
That is, it can be said that it is less likely to appear when the second operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed than when the first operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.
Note that the specific image may be less likely to appear when the first operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed than when the second operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.

In addition, for SP reach and above, in the decisive performance, the first operation promotion image is more likely to notify you of a loss than the second operation promotion image.In other words, in the decisive performance, the second operation promotion image is more likely to be reported The relationship is such that a jackpot is more likely to be reported than a one-operation promotion image.
That is, the first operation promotion image has a relatively "low" jackpot expectation, and the second operation promotion image has a relatively "high" jackpot expectation.
Therefore, it can be said that the variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of a specific image is more likely to appear when the first operation promotion image is displayed, and less likely to appear when the second operation promotion image is displayed.
In addition, when losing SP reach or higher, there is a higher possibility of losing when the first operation promotion image is displayed than when the second operation promotion image is displayed, so the first operation promotion image is displayed. It can be said that the specific image is more likely to be displayed when the specific image is displayed than when the second operation promotion image is displayed.
Note that the specific image may be displayed more easily when the second operation promotion image is displayed than when the first operation promotion image is displayed.

Next, using FIG. 65, a comparative explanation will be given between the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state. In addition, FIG. 65(a) is a diagram that simply shows the percentage of losses and jackpots when the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding performance at SP reach or higher. b) is a diagram that simply shows the percentage of losses and jackpots when the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding performance at SP reach or higher.

(a) is a comparison between a high-probability gaming state and a low-probability gaming state; in the high-probability gaming state, if SP reach or higher is reached, the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decisive effect. The rate of losing is 10/100, and the rate of winning is 90/100. On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state, if the SP reach or higher is reached, the ratio of losing when the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding performance is "70/100", and the ratio of winning the jackpot. is "30/100".
In other words, in the high-probability gaming state, if you reach the final performance with SP reach or higher (if any operation promotion image is displayed in the final performance), you are more likely to get a jackpot, and in the low-probability gaming state, you are more likely to hit the SP If you reach a winning performance with a reach or higher (if any of the operation promotion images are displayed in the winning performance), you tend to lose.
In other words, it is easier to lose when an operation promotion image is displayed in a decision performance in a low probability game state than when an operation promotion image is displayed in a decision performance in a high probability game state, so the specific image is displayed more easily. It can be said that it is easy.

Note that the selection ratio shown in FIG. 65(a) is only an example and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, in a high probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in a high probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Further, for example, in a high probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100", and in a high probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100".
Further, for example, in the low probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the low probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Further, for example, in the low probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100", and in the low probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100".

(b) is a comparison when the operation promotion image displayed in the decisive performance is the second operation promotion image, and in the high probability game state, if the SP reach or higher is reached, the second operation is performed in the decisive performance. The ratio of losing when a promotion image is displayed is "1/100", and the ratio of winning a jackpot is "99/100". On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state, if the SP reach or higher is reached, the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decisive performance, and the probability of losing is "20/100", and the probability of winning the jackpot is "80/100". It is.
In other words, in any gaming state, if the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding performance, there is a tendency for a jackpot to be announced, but in the high probability gaming state, the deciding performance was reached with SP reach or higher. In this case (when the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding performance), it is easier to get a jackpot, and if the low probability game state reaches the deciding performance with SP reach or higher (the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding performance) (if the game is played), it tends to be more likely to result in a loss than in a high probability gaming state.
In other words, it is easier to lose when the second operation promotion image is displayed in a decision performance in a low probability game state than when the second operation promotion image is displayed in a decision performance in a high probability game state. It can be said that the image is easily displayed.

Note that the selection ratio shown in FIG. 65(b) is only an example and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, in a high probability gaming state, if you lose, the selection ratio may be set to ``30/100," and in a high probability gaming state, if you win the jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to ``70/100." In the probability game state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the high probability game state, if the game is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Also, for example, in a low probability gaming state, if you lose, the selection ratio may be set to "40/100", and in a low probability gaming state, if you win the jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "60/100". In the low probability gaming state, if the game is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the low probability gaming state, if the winning is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".

Next, the number of vibrations of the effect button and executable timing for each variable effect pattern will be explained using FIGS. 66, 67, and 75.
In addition, in FIG. 66, "start" indicates the start time of the variable effect, that is, indicates that the effect button 35 vibrates at the start of the variable effect. Moreover, "decision" indicates a decision performance of SP reach or higher, and indicates that the performance button 35 vibrates at, for example, timing T0 shown in FIG. 67 after the decision performance.
In addition, in FIG. 66, a variable performance pattern that involves operation of the performance button 35 is extracted in a fixed performance of SP reach or higher.

As shown in FIG. 66, the number of vibrations of the production button is such that in the case of a loss, vibration is possible at "start", but vibration at "decision" is disabled. Specifically, in the variable performance patterns 12, 16 to 18, the performance button 35 vibrates at "start", and the performance button 35 does not vibrate at "decision". For other losing variable performance patterns, the performance button 35 does not vibrate for both "start" and "decision".
On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, both the "start" vibration and the "clinch" vibration are possible. Specifically, in the variable performance patterns 19 to 24, 26, 27, and 30, the performance button 35 does not vibrate in "start", but the performance button 35 vibrates in "decision". Further, in the variable performance patterns 25, 28, 29, and 31, the performance button 35 vibrates both in "start" and "decision".
Therefore, in the case of a loss, the performance button 35 can vibrate "0" times or "1" time in the 1st variable performance, and in the case of a jackpot, the performance button 35 can vibrate "1" in the 1st variable performance. It can vibrate twice or twice.
In other words, when the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is large (jackpot = 1 or 2 times), the specific image is less likely to be displayed (loss is more likely to occur) than when it is small (loss = 0 or 1). (easily displayed).

Note that FIG. 66 merely shows the number of vibrations of the performance button, and the number of vibrations can be changed as appropriate as long as the above-mentioned trend is followed. For example, there may be more points that vibrate in one variation effect. For example, it may be vibrated in the middle of the variable performance (for example, when transitioning to SP reach).
FIG. 75 is a specific example. In addition, in FIG. 75, "midway" applies to the middle of the variable performance (for example, when transitioning to SP reach), etc., as described above.
As shown in FIG. 75, from the perspective of the "number of vibrations", in the case of a jackpot, it is configured to vibrate at least once "definitely", and also "start", "midway", Since there is also a variable effect pattern that vibrates for all "wins", the effect button 35 is more likely to vibrate than in the case of a loss, as in FIG. 66.
Therefore, as in FIG. 66, when the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is large (jackpot = 1 to 3 times), the specific image is more difficult to display than when it is small (loss = 0 to 2 times) ( (losers are more likely to be displayed).
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 75, depending on the variable performance pattern, the number of vibrations may be greater in the case of a loss than in the case of a jackpot.
For example, the losing variable performance patterns 15, 17, and 18 vibrate at the "start" and "midway," respectively, so the number of vibrations is two. On the other hand, since the jackpot variable performance patterns 19, 20, and 21 vibrate only when the game is decided, the number of vibrations is one. Therefore, a case may occur in which a specific image is more likely to be displayed when the number of vibrations of the performance button 35 is large (loss = 2 times) than when it is small (jackpot = 1 time).
In other words, if it vibrates at the "decision", it will be a jackpot, so the expectation level for a jackpot is "decision">"start" ≒ "in the middle", and from the perspective of the "timing" of the vibration,
(B) When it vibrates at "Decision" (the number of vibrations is 1 time), for example, "Fluctuating effect pattern 19"
(b) If it vibrates in a mode other than “determined” (the number of vibrations is 2), for example, “Fluctuating effect pattern 18”
As in (b) above, even if the number of vibrations exceeds the number of vibrations in (a) above, the specific image is more likely to be displayed in (b) above.
In this way, the relationship between the number of vibrations and the display ratio of a specific image can be seen in terms of the "number of times" of vibrations, as shown in Figure 66, and in terms of the "timing" of vibrations, as shown in Figure 75. may change.

FIG. 67 is a time chart 7 showing the timing of vibrating the effect button 35.
An example in which the effect button 35 does not vibrate will be described using (a) variable effect pattern 7, and an example in which the effect button 35 vibrates (b) using variable effect pattern 21.

(a) is a variable production pattern 7, in which an operation promotion image shown in FIG. 62, for example, is displayed (a button image + press! is displayed) immediately before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination at timing T0. In addition, just before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot judgment at timing T0, press the button image +! The effect that displays is the above-mentioned "determined effect."
Then, at timing T0, it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination was a loss.

Then, from timing T1 to timing T2, the specific image is displayed for 2S, and then transitions to a "temporary stop display period" and a "determined stop display period", but the production button 35 does not vibrate until timing T4. It is designed not to.
That is, in the losing variable performance pattern, the performance button 35 does not vibrate.

(b) is a variable performance pattern 21 in which, for example, an operation promotion image shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (a button image + press! is displayed) immediately before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot determination at timing T0.
Then, at timing T0, it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Then, at timing T0, a jackpot is announced, and the performance button 35 continues to vibrate until timing T3.
Thereby, it is possible to further lift the mood of the player who is elated after reaching the jackpot.
Note that the specific image is not displayed until timing T3.
That is, in the jackpot variable performance pattern, for example, the performance button 35 vibrates at timing T0 when the result of the jackpot determination is announced.
In the above example, the presentation button 35 is vibrated, but the present invention is not limited to vibration, and other modes may be used. For example, it may be a mode in which the light is simply changed from the first position to the second position, or a mode in which the effect button 35 is changed from the first light emission color to the second light emission color.

Note that the game state in which FIGS. 62 to 67 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied to all gaming states or to some gaming states.

Note that in the revival performance of the variable performance pattern 30, the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image may be displayed.
Even if the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image may be displayed even after the specific image 31e is displayed in this way, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image are different from the display of the specific image 31e. The display may be more easily displayed before the specific image 31e than after the specific image 31e is displayed.

(Summary of Figures 62 to 67)
That is, FIGS. 62 to 67 have the following features.

That is,
A first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image (for example, the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62).
A variable effect that executes a first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e (for example, FIG. 64), and a variable effect that executes a second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e (for example, FIG. 64) (For example, the first operation promotion effect is likely to be executed in the case of a loss, and the second operation promotion effect is difficult to be executed in the case of a loss, and accordingly, the display of the specific image 31e (The execution rate of variable effects that accompany this change also differs.)
It has such characteristics.
As a result, for example, when the first operation promotion image is executed, a specific image is often displayed, resulting in a loss; on the other hand, when the second operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is not displayed. It is more likely that you will hit the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the display of a specific image indicates a loss, and the result of the jackpot determination can also be inferred from such a display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

That is,
A first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image (for example, the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62).
Both in the variable effects (for example, FIGS. 62 and 63) that execute the first operation promotion effect and in the variable effects (for example, FIGS. 62 and 63) that execute the second operation promotion effect (for example, the first operation The specific image 31e can be displayed (both in the variable effect accompanied by the promotion effect and in the variable effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect).
It has such characteristics.
With this, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a loss, regardless of which variable performance is performed.
Furthermore, it is no longer necessary to prepare specific images for the first operation promotion image and for the second operation promotion image, leading to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156.

That is,
A first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image (for example, the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62).
Variable performance accompanied by the first operation promotion performance → There are cases in which the specific image 31e is displayed and cases in which it is not displayed (for example, in the variation performance pattern 7, the first operation promotion image can be displayed, and the specific image 31e can be displayed. On the other hand, the variable performance pattern 1 can display the first operation promotion image, but does not display the specific image 31e).
Variable performance accompanied by second operation promotion performance→display specific image 31e (for example, variation performance pattern 12 and variation performance pattern 18 can display the second operation promotion image and can display the specific image 31e) .
It has such characteristics.
This makes it possible to clearly recognize that the reach performance has ended in a loss.

That is,
Execution of an operation promotion performance (for example, a first operation promotion performance that displays a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion performance that displays a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35) It is possible to perform a judgment result notification effect (for example, a decision effect) that notifies the result of the judgment with the following.
In the normal game state, the percentage of execution of judgment result notification performances (for example, decisive performances) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, and in the high probability game state, the percentage of execution of judgment result notification performances (for example, decisive performances) accompanied by the display of the specific images 31e. ) (for example, the ratio of jackpots in the normal gaming state (1/300) and the ratio of jackpots in the high probability gaming state (1/60) are different from the ratio of jackpots in the normal gaming state (1/60). Since it is easier to execute SP reach or higher which is a loss, the ratio of executing the decisive effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, the degree of appearance of the specific image changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

That is,
A first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image (for example, the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62).
If the result of jackpot judgment is a loss,
A variable effect that executes a first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e and a variable effect that executes the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e have different execution rates (for example, , when the first operation promotion image is displayed, it is more likely to result in a loss than when the second operation promotion image is displayed, and because it is more likely to result in a loss, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed.Therefore, with the display of the specific image 31e. , a variable performance that executes a specific performance using the first operation promotion performance, and a variable performance that executes a specific performance using the second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e have different execution ratios.) .
It has such characteristics.
As a result, when the first operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is displayed and there are many cases where the player loses, whereas when the second operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is not displayed and the player wins the jackpot. This is often the case. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the display of a specific image indicates a loss, and the result of the jackpot determination can also be inferred from such a display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

That is,
A first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image (for example, the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62).
A variation effect that executes a second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e in the normal gaming state, and a variation effect that executes a second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the high probability game state. Each performance has a different execution rate (for example, the proportion of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state and the proportion of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in a high probability gaming state are different, but the percentage of winnings in the normal gaming state is higher than the loss SP reach) Since it is easy to execute, a variable performance that executes a specific performance using a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e in the first gaming state, and a display of the specific image 31e in the second gaming state. (The execution rate is different from the variable performance that executes the specific performance using the second operation promotion performance that accompanies this).
It has such characteristics.
As a result, the degree of appearance of the specific image changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

That is,
During execution of the reach effect, there are operation promotion effects (for example, a first operation promotion effect that displays a first operation promotion image, and a second operation promotion effect that displays a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35). 2 operation promotion effect) can be executed.
The operating means (for example, the effect button 35) can be changed from a first mode (for example, a non-vibrating mode) to a second mode (for example, a vibrating mode).
When the number of times the operating means (for example, the production button 35) is set to the second mode (for example, the vibrating mode) is the first number (for example, 0 times), and when the operation means (for example, the production button 35) is set to the second mode (for example, the vibrating mode) The rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs depending on whether the number of times the image is displayed in two modes (for example, the vibrating mode) is the second time (for example, once) (for example, in the case of a loss, the production button 35 If the number of vibrations is 0 and it is a jackpot, the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is 1, and if the number of vibrations is 0, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed to compensate for the loss. Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between when the operating means is not vibrated and when the operating means is vibrated).
It has such characteristics.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image and the number of vibrations of the effect button 35, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended in a loss.

Next, related features will be explained using FIGS. 68 to 74.
Note that the description of the display elements of the image display device 31 that are the same as those described in FIG. 43 will be omitted.

FIG. 68 shows a display example of the image display device 31 when "volume adjustment" is performed during variable display, especially at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, "volume adjustment" using the cross button 36 is possible even during variable display or while waiting for a customer.
Then, when the "volume adjustment" is performed, a level image 31s indicating the current volume level is displayed as shown in FIG. 68(b).
Furthermore, as described above, although no music is being output when the specific image 31e is displayed, the audio output device 32 outputs a volume adjustment sound ("beep♪") at a volume value corresponding to the current volume level. ) is output.
Note that the display mode (size, display position, color, etc.) of the level image 31s during the variable display and the display mode of the level image 31s during the customer waiting state may be the same display mode, or may be different display modes. It may be an aspect. For example, the level image 31s that is being displayed in a variable manner may be displayed in a smaller size than the level image 31s that is in the customer waiting state, or may be displayed in a different display position, or may be displayed in a lighter color. It may be possible, or it may not be displayed in the first place.
Further, during the variable display, the volume adjustment sound ("beep♪") may not be output, and the notification may be made only by displaying the level image 31s.

That is, according to FIG. 68, when "volume adjustment" is performed using the cross button 36 at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed at the right corner of the image display device 31 along with the specific image 31e. That will happen.
In this way, even if the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e, the display area of the specific image 31e is larger than the display area of the level image 31s, so it is possible to prevent the specific image 31e from becoming inconspicuous. .
Note that the example in FIG. 68 shows that the current volume value is "2", and if no operation is performed with the cross button 36 for a predetermined period of time after the level image 31s is displayed, As shown in d), the level image 31s is erased.

In this way, when the "volume adjustment" is performed at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e.
As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in timing when "volume adjustment" is performed, and at the same time, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.
Note that "volume adjustment" in FIG. 68 may be read as "light amount adjustment".

In the time chart 8 of FIG. 69, (a) shows an example in which a decorative member preview (decorative member preview performance in FIG. 38) is performed in the variable performance pattern 7, and (b) shows an example in which a "specific image" is performed in the variable performance pattern 7. '' is displayed, and (c) shows an example in which an effect is performed using the starting port lamp 14b.

(a) is a variation effect pattern 7, and timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. Note that until timing (a) T2, the "decorative member preview" is not executed and the "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, when timing (a) T2 is reached, the "decorative member notice" is executed once at a predetermined timing until timing (a) T4 when the result of the jackpot determination is announced. That is, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are operated from the initial position to the operating position, and after a predetermined period of time, are returned to the initial position.

Then, "missing notification" is performed from timing (a) T4 to timing (a) T5, and "decorative member notice" is not executed after timing (a) T4 (0 times).
Then, a "specific image" is displayed from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6, and thereafter, the display shifts to a "temporary stop display period" and a "determined stop display period".
That is, before the "specific image" is displayed from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6, the "specific image" is displayed from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6. , the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are easily moved to the operating position.
Thereby, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the anticipation for the jackpot can be improved by the decorative member advance notice performance.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations for the jackpot from increasing.

Note that from timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6 when the "specific image" is displayed, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be activated not only once but multiple times. good.
In addition, in the variable presentation pattern for losing, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b do not operate after timing (a) T4, but in the variable presentation pattern 30 for the variable presentation pattern for the jackpot, For example, at timing (f) T7 in FIG. 50, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be activated as part of the revival performance.
In other words, in case of a loss,
Before displaying the "specific image" → it works (winning the decorative component notice), and after displaying the "specific image" → it does not work.
There are cases where it doesn't work before the "specific image" is displayed (you won't win the decorative component notice), and it doesn't work after the "specific image" is displayed.
In case of a jackpot,
Before displaying the "specific image" → it works (winning the decorative component notice), and after displaying the "specific image" → it does not work.
Before displaying the "specific image" → it does not work (not winning the decorative member notice), after displaying the "specific image" → it does not work,
Before displaying the "specific image" → it does not work (not winning the decorative member notice), and after displaying the "specific image" → it works (resurrection effect).
There are two cases: before the "specific image" is displayed → it activates (winning the decorative member notice), and after the "specific image" is displayed → it activates (resurrection effect).
There will be.

(b) is a variation effect pattern 7, which mainly shows the characteristic part of the "background switching" scene.
Timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the "specific image" is displayed.
At this time, the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON (power is supplied via the power plug 141).
Then, at timing (b) T1 while the "specific image" is being displayed (for example, before 2S elapses), a power outage occurs and the gaming machine 1 is powered off (power is not supplied via the power plug 141). becomes. In this case, since the image display device 31 is also turned off, the "specific image" is not displayed either.

Then, at timing (b) T2, the power outage is resolved and power is restored, and the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Note that timing (b) T2 is during "background switching" and is during the display period of the "specific image" (for example, before 2S elapses). Therefore, it is possible to display the "specific image" that was displayed before the power outage again, but the image at power restoration (please wait for a while while the power is restored) is prioritized over redisplaying the "specific image". Displayed on the image display device 31.
That is, at timing (b) T2, the "specific image" is not displayed, but the power restoration image (please wait for a while while power is restored) is displayed.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs while the "specific image" is being displayed (for example, before 2S elapses), the "specific image" will not be displayed again, but rather the image when the power is restored (please wait for a while while the power is being restored). ) is displayed on the image display device 31 with priority.
Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the content that should be given top priority according to the current situation of the gaming machine 1.

(c) shows that a performance using the hold icon and the starting gate lamp 14b is performed in a continuous variation performance, and as the first variation (first game), the variation performance pattern 1 is executed, This shows that the variation effect pattern 7 was executed as the second variation (second game).
Please note that only the main parts of each variation production will be explained.

Timing (c) T0 is the timing of the "determined stop display period" of the variation effect pattern 1 in the first variation.
At this timing, the final still image is displayed on the image display device 31. Further, a game ball enters the first starting port 14, and "Hold" is updated from "0" to "1" (stored in the first storage section).
In addition, based on the ball entering the first starting port 14, the player wins the execution of a pre-reading effect using the hold icon and the starting port lamp 14b, and as the holding icon, the green color starts from the time the ball enters the first starting port 14. It is assumed that a pre-read effect has been executed in which a hold icon is displayed and the starting port lamp 14b is lit (light-emitted) in green.
That is, from this timing, the "starting port lamp" changes from off to on (green), and the "image display device" displays a green pending icon image.
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
These aspects continue until timing (c) T1 is reached.

Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the first variation effect pattern 1 ends and the second variation effect pattern 7 starts.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation period" in the second fluctuation effect pattern 7 starts, and the "image display device" displays the normal fluctuation image and the green pending icon image (shifted to the relevant fluctuation icon display area 31a). ) is displayed.
Incidentally, with the start of the second variation, "Hold" becomes "0" (no memory in the first storage section to second storage section), and the starting port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green). That is, the green pending icon image of the "image display device" and the lighting (green) of the starting port lamp 14b are continuously performed over at least two fluctuations.
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, these aspects continue until timing (c) T2, and from timing (c) T2, the green hold icon image is hidden and becomes invisible to the player, but the starting gate lamp 14b is It continues to be lit (green) and remains visible to players. In other words, even if the green pending icon image is hidden due to the transition to the "SP reach variation period", the starting gate lamp 14b emits light in the color corresponding to the green pending icon image that is hidden. By visually recognizing the starting lamp 14b, the player can grasp the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Timing (c) T3 is the timing when the "SP reach variation period" has started, and at this timing, the SP reach image is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, the starting port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green).
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
Thereafter, "loss notification" is performed at the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, and reaches timing (c) T4.

Timing (c) T4 is the timing of transition from the "SP reach variation period" to the "background switching", and at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for "2S period".
Further, the starting port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green).
These aspects continue until timing (c) T5.
Then, at timing (c) T5, the "specific image" is hidden, but the starting port lamp 14b remains lit (green) until the "determined stop display period" (not shown) is completed. continue.
That is, in a look-ahead effect using a hold icon and the starting gate lamp 14b, the hold icon may be hidden and become unrecognizable during the fluctuating performance, but the starting gate lamp 14b may not be displayed during the fluctuating performance. It never becomes visible and is always visible.
Therefore, even if the "specific image" is displayed by "background switching", the light emitting effect (for example, lighting (green)) by the starting port lamp 14b will not become invisible due to the display of the "specific image". There is no mutual interference.
Thereby, by displaying the "specific image", it is clearly recognized that the reach effect has ended, and at the same time, by the start lamp 14b, it is made to understand the level of expectation for a jackpot in the finished reach effect. I can do it.

FIG. 70 shows a case where the "design confirmation command" transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received by the production control board 120, and a case where it is not normally received.
Note that the timing at which the "symbol confirmation command" is received by the production control board 120 is approximately the timing (c).
Therefore, the display mode is the same in all cases until the "missing notification" is performed in (a) and the "specific image 31e" is displayed in (b).
In addition, the temporary stop display in (c) will have the same display mode up to the middle, but if the "symbol confirmation command" is not received normally, the production pattern will not be displayed as a fixed stop, but will remain in the temporary stop display. becomes.

That is, in either case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.
In addition, if the production symbol in Fig. 70(d) is not displayed as a fixed stop and the “design confirmation command” has not been received as shown in , the temporary stop display of the production symbol continues, and the result of the jackpot determination is There has been a problem in that the game is not determined and the player feels troubled.
However, in either case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it can be inferred that the reach effect has ended in a loss by displaying the "specific image 31e", so the "design confirmation command" is not received. If not, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered even if the result of the jackpot determination is not finalized.

FIG. 71 is a table excerpting error-related commands related to errors that may occur in the gaming machine 1 and the priority order of the error-related commands.
In addition, in FIG. 71, "priority" refers to which error notification should be prioritized when multiple errors occur at the same time, or whether notification should be given at the same time as other displays, etc. It stipulates the following.
For example, when a "big winning slot abnormal winning error" and a "dish full error" occur at the same time, priority is given to the error notification etc. related to the "big winning opening abnormal winning error".
In addition, if it is "specified when power is restored", as shown in FIG. If it is "dish full error end designation", as shown in FIG. 72, which will be described later, for example, an ejection promotion image 31u that urges ejection of game balls from the tray 40 is displayed at the same time as the specific image 31e (other displays, etc. (can be notified at the same time).

Error-related commands are "specified at power-on" (power ON accompanied by RAM clear SW operation) with a priority of "1" (highest priority), and "designated at power restoration" with a priority of "2". (Power ON without RAM clear SW operation), "Big winning slot abnormal winning error" with priority "3" (for example, big winning slot detection SW turned ON even though there is no jackpot), Priority "Panel surface abnormality error start designation" with a priority of "4" (for example, a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor (not shown) detects abnormal magnetism or abnormal radio waves), "Door open error start designation with a priority of "5" Door open "Error end designation" (for example, when the door open switch 133 detects the door opening), "Dish full error start designation, Plate full error end designation" with a priority of "6" (for example, when there are more than a predetermined amount of game balls in the tray 40). For example, "switch unconnected error start designation, switch unconnected error end designation" with a priority of "7" (for example, detects that one of the switches is unconnected).

FIG. 72 shows a case (hereinafter referred to as case 1) in which a power outage occurs and the gaming machine 1 is turned off due to a power failure while displaying a "specific image", and a case in which a predetermined amount of This is an animation showing a case in which the above game balls are stored and a plate full error occurs (hereinafter referred to as case 2).
Note that FIG. 72 corresponds to the time chart explaining the (b) variable effect pattern 7 described in FIG. 69.

Timing (b) to T0 is timing (b) to T0 in FIG. 69, and in each case, "loss notification" is performed.
In case 1, a "specific image" is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T1, and at timing (b) T1, a power outage occurs and the power of gaming machine 1 is turned off. The image display device 31 is turned off (the screen becomes pitch black).
Then, at timing (b) T2, the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and the specific image 31e is not redisplayed on the image display device 31, but the image at the time of power restoration (Please wait for a while while the power is being restored) is displayed.

On the other hand, in case 2, the "specific image" is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T3.
Although not shown in FIG. 69, if a plate full error (low priority error) occurs between timing (b) T0 and timing (b) T3, the front side of the specific image 31e The discharge promotion image 31u is displayed superimposed on the section.
That is, the specific image 31e and the discharge promotion image 31u are displayed at the same time.
Then, from timing (b) T3 onwards, a temporary stop display is performed.

That is, if a power outage occurs while the specific image 31e is being displayed, and a high-priority "specify when power is restored" command is received during the display period of the specific image 31e, the power will be restored without redisplaying the specific image 31e. The time image (Please wait while the power is being restored) is displayed with priority.
On the other hand, if a low-priority "dish full error start designation" command is received while the specific image 31e is being displayed, the specific image 31e is continued to be displayed, and at the same time, the ejection promotion image 31u is displayed.
As a result, according to the predetermined priority order, those with a high priority are notified in the entire display area of the image display device 31, and those with a low priority are notified in a part of the display area of the image display device 31. Since notification is performed, accurate display can be performed according to the priority order.
That is, for items with a high priority such as "specify when power is restored", by clearly informing the process until the gaming machine 1 is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

For example, if a "switch disconnection error" with a priority of "7" occurs during the display period of the specific image 31e, the display mode will be similar to that of the plate full error shown in FIG. 72.
That is, an image notifying the switch disconnection error is displayed together with the specific image 31e.
Here, in case of a switch disconnection error, it is necessary to turn off the power of the gaming machine 1 and check the disconnected switch.
Therefore, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 may turn off the power in order to perform the above confirmation while the specific image 31e is displayed and an image notifying the switch disconnection error is displayed.
In such a case, if you resolve the disconnection of the switch and turn on the power to the gaming machine 1 again, the image when the power is restored (please wait for a while while the power is being restored) will be prioritized instead of displaying the specific image 31e again. to be displayed.
That is, even if the situation before the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off is that an image notifying the switch disconnection error is displayed together with the specific image 31e, or only the specific image 31e is displayed. When the power is restored, the specific image 31e is not displayed again, and the image at the time of power restoration (Please wait for a while while the power is being restored) is displayed with priority.
Thereby, regardless of the display status before the power outage, it is possible to notify on the entire display area of the image display device 31 that the power to the gaming machine 1 has been restored.

FIG. 73 shows a case where there is no "change pending icon" and a case where there is a "change pending icon".
Note that the description before the "loss notification" in (a) is omitted, but for example, in a case where there is a "change pending icon", when the fluctuation effect is started, " The following explanation assumes that the "change pending icon" is displayed.

In the case where there is no "change pending icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), the pending icon in the normal color (in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, as shown in (c) and (d). A hold icon (indicated by a circle) is displayed.
In the case where there is a "change pending icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), the pending icon display area 31b has a pending color different from the normal color, as shown in (c) and (d). An icon (pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed.
That is, before the specific image 31e is displayed, for example, at the start of the variation in the variation effect, a pending icon of a color different from the normal color (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b. In this case, after the specific image 31e is displayed, it is displayed again in the pending icon display area 31b in the same display mode (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure).
This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
Note that if a pending icon of a color different from the normal color (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b before the specific image 31e is displayed, after the specific image 31e is displayed, A normal color pending icon (the pending icon indicated by "○" in the figure) may be displayed in the pending icon display area 31b (default display after the specific image 31e is displayed).
Furthermore, if a pending icon of a color different from the normal color (the pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b before the specific image 31e is displayed, after the specific image 31e is displayed, Further, the pending icon may be changed to a color with a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, the pending icon displayed as "●" may be displayed as "◎").

Note that the normal color pending icon may be changed to the "change pending icon" through various effects. For example, the pending icon itself may be displayed in a large size, and the change may be made through an effect that encourages whether or not to change to the "change pending icon", or a character image (so-called mini-character image) that is approximately the same size as the pending icon may be displayed. The mini-character image may be displayed and the mini-character image may be displayed to prompt whether or not to change to the "change pending icon."
However, in the scenes shown in FIGS. 73(b), (c), and (d), the effect that prompts whether or not the icon will change to the "change pending icon" is not executed.
Thereby, in particular, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from being obstructed, and it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.

FIG. 74 shows a modification.
In addition, in any gaming state of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, when SP reach or SPSP reach is not executed, a variable display is performed on one performance symbol line (single line), and SP reach is not executed. , or in SPSP reach, a reach effect may be performed with a plurality of effect symbol lines.
In such a gaming machine, for example, as shown in (a), a so-called double reach effect is performed in which a reach effect using ``2 symbols'' and a reach effect using ``3 symbols'' are simultaneously performed during the ``SP reach variation period''. (Multiple production pattern lines), as shown in (b), after displaying the specific image 31e and obscuring the production pattern 38, as shown in (c) and (d), "normal variation It may be possible to return to the 1 effect pattern line when the "Period" etc. are performed.
Thereby, it is possible to return to the first performance symbol line after a pause in the display of the specific image 31e, so that switching can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, the specific image 31e is not limited to an image imitating a shutter as shown in FIG. 43, etc., but may also be an image imitating a curtain as shown in FIG. 74, or an image representing a motif (model name, etc.) of the gaming machine 1 (not shown). It may be an image of a character (not shown), an image imitating smoke, fog, or mist (not shown), or a whiteout image or blackout image (not shown).
Further, even if the specific image 31e is the same, the display time of the specific image 31e may vary depending on the type of the variable effect pattern, for example. For example, the display time of the specific image 31e may be longer in a variable effect pattern that involves the execution of SPSP reach than in a variable effect pattern that involves the execution of SP reach.
Further, two or more types of specific images 31e may be included. In that case, they may be used depending on the game state, mode, etc.
Furthermore, the specific images 31e may have multiple types of low probability gaming states and high probability gaming states.
Further, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and the specific images 31e may be displayed in accordance with the mode in the same gaming state.
Further, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and a special specific image 31e that is selected with a high probability when executing the variable effect pattern 30, for example, may be included in the plurality of specific images 31e. Thereby, it is possible to create an expectation that a revival effect will occur when the special specific image 31e is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when shielding is performed using the specific image 31e, for example, the specific image 31e imitating a curtain may be used to shield from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31. Further, it may be from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31, from the top side of the screen of the image display device 31, or from the bottom side of the screen of the image display device 31.
In this way, the effect patterns 38 and the like are gradually obscured, thereby making it visually interesting.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when canceling the shielding by the specific image 31e, similarly to the case of shielding, it is canceled from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31, and the display elements displayed on the left side of the screen are exposed. It may be released from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display elements displayed on the right side of the screen, or it may be released from the top of the screen of the image display device 31. The image may be released from the bottom of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display elements displayed at the bottom of the screen. You can do as you like.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery is one probability each in the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state, but it is not limited to this. It may be a so-called setting-equipped gaming machine that has different jackpot probabilities for each set value in multiple stages.
For example, if the setting value 1 is a jackpot probability of 1/300 in the low probability gaming state and the jackpot probability of 1/60 in the high probability gaming state, as shown in FIG. A game parlor can set arbitrary set values, such as a jackpot probability of 1/240 in a high probability game state and a jackpot probability of 1/40 in a high probability game state (the probabilities of set values 2 to 5 are omitted).
By installing setting values in this way, players can play games while guessing whether an advantageous jackpot probability or an unfavorable jackpot probability has been set. It can contribute to improving interest.

When such setting values are installed, the specific image 31e may be used to suggest which setting value is set among the multiple levels of setting values (the specific image 31e , it has the role of so-called setting suggestion direction).
Specifically, when a setting value is set, a command indicating which setting value has been set is transmitted, and therefore setting value information based on the command is stored in the sub-RAM 120c.
Further, a plurality of types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156, for example, with different designs and colors.
For example, when the sub CPU 120a determines a variable effect pattern for displaying the specific image 31e, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if not, determines to display the normal specific image 31e. Then, when executed, it is decided to display a special specific image 31e according to the setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 120c.

For example, when setting value 1 is set and a setting suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that setting value 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5 (odd number setting value) is set. It is decided to display a special specific image 31e.
On the other hand, when setting value 6 is set and a setting suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that setting value 2, setting value 4, or setting value 6 (even setting value) is set. A special specific image 31e, a special specific image 31e, or a special specific image 31e that suggests that there is a high possibility that one of setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 (so-called high setting value) is set, and setting value 6. It is decided to display a special specific image 31e that definitively indicates that .
Note that when the setting value 6 is set and a setting suggestion effect is executed, it is easy to decide to display a special specific image 31e that suggests that an even number setting value is likely to be set, and the setting value 6 It may be made so that it is difficult to decide to display a special specific image 31e that definitively indicates that .

In this way, by giving the specific image 31e the role of a so-called setting suggestion effect, useful information can be provided to a player who is disappointed after losing the SP reach, for example. Therefore, it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play.
Furthermore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a greater desire for the SP reach or higher to be executed.

Furthermore, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 may be changed for each set value in multiple stages. For example, if the distribution ratio in FIG. 33 is a set value of 1, and the set value is 6, another variable effect pattern determination table may be stored in the sub ROM 120b. For example, in FIG. 33, the distribution ratio of the variable performance pattern 16 is 70%, the distribution ratio of the variable performance pattern 17 is 20%, and the distribution ratio of the variable performance pattern 18 is 10%. In the variable performance pattern determination table with value 6, the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 16 is 30%, the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 17 is 30%, and the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 18 is 40%. You can. Furthermore, there may be a variable performance pattern that is likely to appear for each set value in multiple stages.
With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the set value from the executed variable effect pattern, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
Note that if the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern of FIG. 33 is configured to change for each set value of multiple stages, the appearance ratio of the specific image 31e will naturally also change for each set value of multiple stages. . In this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the set value from the specific image 31e whose appearance rate changes for each set value in a plurality of stages, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, although it has been mentioned that the specific image 31e may have the role of a so-called setting suggestion effect, it may also have the role of a preview effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot.
Specifically, the degree of expectation that the "resurrection effect" in the variable effect pattern 30 of FIG. 33 will be executed may be indicated by the specific image 31e.
In this case, multiple types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156, and for example, in the variable effect pattern 18 (loss), the normal specific image 31e is made easier to select than the special specific image 31e, and the variable effect pattern is 30 (Jackpot), the special specific image 31e is made easier to select than the normal specific image 31e, and when the special specific image 31e is displayed, there is an expectation that a "resurrection effect" will be executed. make it possible to do so.
This prevents the display of the specific image 31e from merely serving as a background switch, thereby making the player desire to see the special specific image 31e, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.
Note that the specific image 31e may have the role of setting suggestion effect and the role of preview effect at the same time.
As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the display of the specific image 31e at once, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine has been described as having a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a high probability gaming state, but the gaming states can be changed as appropriate.
For example, it may be a gaming machine that has a normal gaming state and a high probability gaming state but does not have a time-saving gaming state, or it may be a gaming machine that has a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (for example, a gaming machine of 1 type and 2 types), A gaming machine that does not have a high probability gaming state may also be used.
Note that even in such a gaming machine, a common specific image 31e may be used in different gaming states, or a different specific image 31e may be used for each gaming state.

(Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, in order to make the player clearly aware that the reach effect has developed, there have been machines that perform the development effect and then the reach effect (for example, Fig. 14 of JP 2013-121404A ``Fusuma production''). However, after the reach effect ends (for example, ends after notifying the loser), no effect is performed at all, so some players may not be able to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and may lose interest in the game. It was also a contributing factor to the decline in

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), and the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to perform a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect, and when the specific effect is executed (for example, the small effect pattern 38d in FIG. 43). A specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed in (c) T4 to T5), and while the specific image is being displayed (for example, (c) T5 to T6 in FIG. 43), the second symbol can be visually recognized. After the specific image is displayed (for example, from T6 to T7 in FIG. 43(c)), both the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed so as to be visible.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to perform a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect, and when the specific effect is executed (for example, the small effect pattern 38d in FIG. 43). A specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed in (c) T4 to T5), and before (for example, T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, 43 (c) T7 to T8), the display mode of the second symbol does not change (for example, only a symbol consisting of numbers), but the display mode of the first symbol can change (for example, only a symbol consisting of numbers) (can be changed to a pattern consisting of numbers and a pattern consisting of characters).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), A variable effect (for example, a variable effect) that temporarily stops (for example, stops with the effect pattern 38 slightly swaying) and then makes a main stop (for example, stops completely without moving the effect pattern 38 or the small effect pattern 38d). Pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and when the specific performance is executed (for example, A specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed in (c) T4 to T5), and when the specific image is displayed (for example, in (c) of FIG. 44), the pattern can be temporarily stopped (for example, , in (c) T6 to T7 of FIG. 44, a predetermined effect (for example, motion effect using a character pattern) is not executed, but when the specific image is not displayed (for example, in (a) of FIG. 44), the specified effect is not executed. At the temporary stop (for example, T1 to T2 in FIG. 44(a)), a predetermined effect (for example, motion effect using a character pattern) can be performed.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (for example, a jackpot determination process), and a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (for example, a jackpot determination process), and a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (game), and a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (game), When the judgment is made, the identification information (e.g., special symbol) is displayed variably and then stopped. Identification information display control means (e.g., first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of determination, and predetermined commands (e.g., set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a) command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means transmits the predetermined commands from the command transmitting means. can be received (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), fluctuates the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbols 38, small production symbols 38d), and stops the symbols. (For example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) can be executed, and the reserved image (for example, displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c) corresponding to the right stored in the reserved storage means is A reservation display effect (for example, a first special symbol reservation number display) that displays the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the second special symbol reservation number (U2) displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d. The display of 0 to 4 displayed in the area 31c, the display of 0 to 4 displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d) can be executed, and in the variable production, specific production (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, from T4 to T5 in FIG. 43 (c)), a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the specific image Before (for example, T4 to T5 in FIG. 43C) and after (for example, T7 to T8 in FIG. 43C) the pending image is displayed, the display mode of the held image does not change (for example, the size and design etc. do not change), but the display mode of the design can be changed (for example, it is possible to change from a design consisting only of numbers to a design consisting of numbers and characters, that is, the size, design, etc. can be changed). .
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), wherein the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and the above-mentioned A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a predetermined command (for example, executed by main CPU 110a). command transmitting means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means transmits various commands that are set and transmitted in each process. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d) corresponding to the identification information. , it is possible to execute a variable production that stops the symbol (for example, variation production pattern 1 to variation production pattern 33), and it is possible to execute a specific production (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variation production. , a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 45(c) T4 to T5 (normal), FIG. 45(c) T4 to T5 (high probability)). Yes, the specific image that can be displayed in the first gaming state can also be displayed in the second gaming state (for example, FIG. 45(c) T5 to T6 (normal), FIG. 45(c) T5 to T6 (high probability). ), the common specific image 31e can be displayed.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops mode (for example, mode B in FIG. 46), and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and the specific performance can be executed. When executed (for example, FIG. 46(c) T4 to T5 (mode A), FIG. 46(c) T4 to T5 (mode B)), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the The specific image that can be displayed in the first mode can also be displayed in the second mode (for example, common in FIG. 46(c) T5 to T6 (mode A) and FIG. 46(c) T5 to T6 (mode B)). (can display a specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the performance, and in the variable performance, a specific performance accompanied by music (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18) can be executed. A specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18), and in the variable effect, a plurality of songs can be displayed. It is possible to execute the specific performance consisting of (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18), and the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied). If the specific image is displayed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18), the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied), and the above-mentioned Compared to the case where a specific image is not displayed (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 6), it is easier to execute the specific effect consisting of the plurality of songs (for example, in variable effect pattern 1, a specific image is displayed) In contrast, variation production pattern 7 is a variation production in which a specific image is displayed and the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs in the reach production is 2). ).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a production control means (for example, production control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , among the specific productions, a first specific production (for example, variable production pattern 7) and a second specific production (for example, variable production pattern 16) different from the first specific production, the number of songs is different (for example, variable performance pattern 7 has 3 songs (number of songs for reach performance is 2), variable performance pattern 16 has 4 songs (number of songs for reach performance is 3)), and executes the first specific performance. There are cases in which the specific image is displayed after the execution of the second specific effect, and cases in which the specific image is displayed after the second specific effect is executed.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , at least a part of the period (for example, "background switching" between the "normal reach variation period" and the "SP reach variation period" in variation production pattern 7) and the specific image are displayed among the specific effects. The period (for example, the "background switching" between the "SP reach fluctuation period" and the "temporary stop display period" in variable production pattern 7) is the period without the music (for example, the period when no music is output). ).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , before the specific image is displayed, the song is accompanied by the song (for example, in the case of variable production pattern 7, song A, song B, and song C are output), and after the specific image is displayed, the song is accompanied by the song. No music (for example, no music is output).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), A variable effect (for example, a variable effect) that temporarily stops (for example, stops with the effect pattern 38 slightly swaying) and then makes a main stop (for example, stops completely without moving the effect pattern 38 or the small effect pattern 38d). Pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), and the specific performance When executing (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and a variable effect accompanied by the display of the specific image (for example, During the temporary stop of the symbol (for example, during the temporary stop display period) in the variable production pattern 7), a production sound (for example, the stop sound of the production pattern 38) is not output, and the variation production that does not involve the display of the specific image (for example, When the symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, during a temporary stop display period) in the variable performance pattern 1), a performance sound (for example, the stop sound of the performance pattern 38) is output.
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a production control means (for example, production control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (for example, a jackpot determination process), and a determining means that executes the special game according to a determination result that the special game is to be played. A special game execution control means (for example, the main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the above, and when the judgment is made, the result of the judgment is displayed by displaying the identification information (for example, the special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping the display. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (for example, various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a) The production control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing). This is step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing, and is a variation production (for example, a variation production pattern) in which the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbols 38, small production symbols 38d) are varied and the symbols are stopped. 1 to variable performance pattern 33), and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18), and when the specific performance is executed (for example, , a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed in the variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18), and the result of the determination is that the special game will not be played (for example, step S311 of the jackpot determination process). −1), and a variable production that executes a specific production using a first symbol (for example, the production pattern 38 of 6 symbols) accompanied by the display of the specific image; The variable performance that executes a specific performance using the second symbol (for example, the production symbol 38 of 7 symbols) has a different execution rate (for example, if the jackpot judgment process is a loss, the 6 symbol is The specific image 31e may not be displayed because the symbol 7 is also selected, but the specific image 31e is displayed because the 7 symbol is selected only when it is equal to or higher than the SP reach. Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between when it is a reach with 6 symbols and when it is a reach with 7 symbols).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a game (for example, a jackpot determination process), and a determining means that executes the special game according to a determination result that the special game is to be played. A special game execution control means (for example, the main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the above, and when the judgment is made, the result of the judgment is displayed by displaying the identification information (for example, the special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping the display. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (for example, various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a) The production control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing). This is step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing, and is a variation production (for example, a variation production pattern) in which the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbols 38, small production symbols 38d) are varied and the symbols are stopped. 1 to variable effect pattern 33), and in the variable effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), and the specific effect can be executed. When executed (for example, variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the first symbol (for example, 6-design production pattern 38) ) is used to execute the first suggestive effect (for example, a symbol inciting effect to incite whether or not to reach with 6 symbols) to determine whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the second suggestive effect (for example, A case where a second suggestion performance (for example, a symbol stimulation performance that stimulates whether or not to reach with the 7 symbols) is executed using the 7 symbol production symbol 38) to determine whether or not to execute the specific production. Yes, there is a variable effect in which the specific effect is executed after the first suggestive effect accompanied by the display of the specific image, and a variable effect in which the specific effect is executed after the second suggestive effect accompanied by the display of the specific image. The execution ratios of the fluctuating effects that execute the effects are different (for example, the 6-symbol effect is more likely to succeed than the 7-symbol effect, and the 7-symbol effect is more likely to fail than the 6-symbol effect). Therefore, the 6 symbol is more likely to become a reach than the 7 symbol, and because it is easier to become a reach, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed, and the 6 symbol is a symbol inciting effect that incites whether or not to be a reach, and the 7 symbol is a reach. The rate at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs depending on the pattern inciting effect that incites whether or not the specific image 31e is displayed).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops When the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, During execution of the performance, it is possible to perform an operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35), and the operation promotion The performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion performance that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion performance is executed. an operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a second operation promotion image), a variable effect for executing the first operation promotion effect accompanied by display of the specific image, and accompanied by display of the specific image, The variable performance that executes the second operation promotion performance has a different execution rate (for example, the first operation promotion performance is likely to be executed in the event of a loss, and the second operation promotion performance is difficult to be executed in the event of a loss). (There is a difference in the execution rate of the variable effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), wherein the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops When the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, During execution of the performance, it is possible to perform an operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35), and the operation promotion The performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion performance that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion performance is executed. (For example, displaying a second operation promotion image) images can be displayed (for example, in a variable effect in which the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62 is displayed, or in a variable effect in which the second operation promotion image in FIG. 62 is displayed, in FIG. 62(c), a specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops When the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, During execution of the performance, it is possible to perform an operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35), and the operation promotion The performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion performance that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion performance is executed. (e.g. display of a second operation promotion image), and in a variable effect accompanied by the first operation promotion effect, the specific image may or may not be displayed (for example, The variable effect pattern 7 can display the first operation promotion image, and can display the specific image 31e. On the other hand, in the variation effect pattern 1, the first operation promotion image can be displayed, but the specific image 31e is not displayed), and in the variation effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect, the specific image is displayed (for example, The variable effect pattern 12 and the variable effect pattern 18 can display the second operation promotion image, and can display the specific image 31e).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and the above-mentioned A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a predetermined command (for example, executed by main CPU 110a). command transmitting means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means transmits various commands that are set and transmitted in each process. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d) corresponding to the identification information. , it is possible to execute a variable performance that stops the symbol (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33), and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , a determination result that notifies the result of the determination with execution of an operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image or display of a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35); It is possible to execute a notification performance (for example, a decision performance), and the rate at which the determination result notification performance accompanied by the display of the specific image is executed in the first gaming state, and the rate at which the judgment result notification performance accompanied by the display of the specific image is executed in the second gaming state are determined. This is different from the rate at which the judgment result notification effect accompanied by the display is executed (for example, the rate at which a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in a normal gaming state and the rate at which a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in a high probability gaming state are different; Since SP reach or higher is likely to be executed for a loss, the ratio of execution of the deciding performance accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the , and it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18) in the variable performance. A specific image (e.g., specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (e.g., variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18), and during execution of the variable effect, the operating means (e.g. , the performance button 35) (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image), the operation promotion effect includes a first operation promotion effect. (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a second operation promotion image) that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion image is executed. display of a promotion image), and if the result of the determination is not to play the special game (for example, denying step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process), the first game with the display of the specific image A variable performance that executes the specific performance using the first operation promotion performance and a variable performance that executes the specific performance using the second operation promotion performance that is accompanied by display of the specific image have different execution rates. (For example, the display of the first operation promotion image is more likely to result in a loss than the display of the second operation promotion image, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed to the extent that it is more likely to result in a loss. Therefore, a variable effect that executes a specific effect using a first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, and a variable effect that executes a specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e. (The execution rate is different for each).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and the above-mentioned A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state, time saving gaming state) different from the first gaming state, and a predetermined command (for example, executed by main CPU 110a). command transmitting means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means transmits various commands that are set and transmitted in each process. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d) corresponding to the identification information. , it is possible to execute a variable performance that stops the symbol (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33), and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) ), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. , during execution of the fluctuation effect, it is possible to perform an operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35); The operation promotion performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image) and a level of expectation that the special game will be executed compared to when the first operation promotion performance is executed. and a high second operation promotion effect (for example, displaying a second operation promotion image), and the specification using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image in the first gaming state. The variable performance that executes the performance and the variable performance that executes the specific performance that uses the second operation promotion performance that is accompanied by the display of the specific image in the second game state have different execution rates ( For example, the percentage of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state and the percentage of jackpots determined to be a jackpot in a high-probability gaming state are different.In the normal gaming state, it is more likely to execute a loss SP reach or higher, so in the first gaming state. A variable performance that executes a specific performance using a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of a specific image 31e, and a second operation promotion performance accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the second game state. (The execution rate is different from the variable performance that executes a specific performance.)
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◇A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a production control means (for example, production control board 120), wherein the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops When the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, While the performance is being performed, it is possible to execute an operation promotion performance (for example, displaying a first operation promotion image or displaying a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the performance button 35), and the operation It is possible to change the means from a first state (e.g., non-vibrating state) to a second state (e.g., vibrating state), and the number of times the operating means is placed in the second state is a first number of times. (for example, 0 times) and when the second number of times (for example, 1 time) is different from the first number of times, the rate at which the specific image is displayed is different (for example, in the case of a loss, the display rate is different). If the number of vibrations of the button 35 is 0 and it is a jackpot, the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is 1, and if the number of vibrations is 0, the specific image 31e will be displayed to compensate for the loss. easy to be Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between when the operating means is not vibrated and when the operating means is vibrated).
Thereby, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole, a special game judgment is made to determine whether or not to generate a special game advantageous to the player, and a variable performance is performed based on the result of the special game judgment. There is a game that performs a suggestive performance that suggests the result of the special game determination while the variable performance is being performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-221253). However, there was a problem that interest in the game was likely to decrease.

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), and the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Reach 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Reach 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "All "rotation fluctuation period", temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification effects that anticipate the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo continuous 2 notification period" and "pseudo continuous display period"). 3 notification period", the dialogue image "Reach!" in the "Speech Preview Performance", selection of options in the "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selection of "SP" in Figure 56), and step-up in the "SU Preview Performance" It is possible to display the preview performance image 31p (for example, the display of "probable SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) and the display of the "specific image 31e"), and to execute the suggestion notification performance (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e" in FIG. 52). (a) T1 to (a) T3), when the timing for executing the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, (a) T4 to (a) Pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at T5), and the number of executable suggestion notification performances and suggestion performances is different before the predetermined timing and after the predetermined timing (for example, the number of executable suggestion notification performances is different from the number after the predetermined timing Previously, it was possible to perform the following suggested notification performances: ``Pseudo 2nd notification period'', ``Pseudo 3rd notification period'', ``Speech preview performance'', ``Roulette notification performance'', and ``SU preview performance'', and each of these Suggestive effects can be executed accordingly. On the other hand, after the predetermined timing, only the suggestion notification effect of the display of the "specific image 31e" can be executed, and the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" corresponding to the display of the "specific image 31e" is possible. (Only the suggested production is possible).
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆ A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Reach 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Reach 3 fluctuation period", "Normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "All "rotation fluctuation period", temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification effects that anticipate the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo continuous 2 notification period" and "pseudo continuous display period"). 3 notification period", the dialogue image "Reach!" in the "Speech Preview Performance", selection of options in the "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selection of "SP" in Figure 56), and step-up in the "SU Preview Performance" It is possible to display the preview performance image 31p (for example, the display of "probable SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) and the display of the "specific image 31e"), and to execute the suggestion notification performance (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e" in FIG. 52). (a) T1 to (a) T3), when the timing for executing the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, (a) T4 to (a) Pseudo-Run 2 variation is executed at T5), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 notification period" or "Pseudo-Run 3 notification period") and the first A combination with a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo consecutive 2 variable period" or "Pseudo consecutive 3 variable period") and a second suggestive announcement performance (for example, "Reach! ” dialogue image) and a second suggestion presentation (for example, “normal reach fluctuation period”), and after the predetermined timing, a third suggestion notification presentation (for example, “specific image 31e" display) and a third suggestion effect (for example, temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period").
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆ A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the special game, and in the variable performance, a preview performance (for example, a dialogue preview performance) that foretells the possibility that the special game will occur can be executed. The result of the determination can be announced at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52), and the suggestive performance according to the result of the determination can be performed in the fluctuating performance. (For example, the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "pseudo series 2 variation period", "pseudo series 3 variation period", "SP reach variation period", "full rotation variation period", "temporary stop display period"), Selection of options in the suggestion notification performance (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", "Roulette notice performance") that makes you expect that the suggestion production will be executed (for example, "SP ”), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in the “SU preview performance” (for example, displaying “Probable SU5 Full Rotation” in FIG. 56), and displaying the “specific image 31e”). , After the suggestion notification effect has been executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestion effect is executed. (for example, execute the pseudo continuous 2 variation from (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo continuous 2 notification period") is executed. or "pseudo series 3 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo series 2 variable period" or "pseudo series 3 variable period"), and after the predetermined timing, There are cases where a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the "specific image 31e") and a second suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") are executed, When executing the suggestion notification effect of 1, the preview effect is executable (for example, in FIG. ), when executing the second suggestion notification effect, the preview effect is not executed (for example, in FIG. 52, in the "background switching" that displays the "specific image 31e", the line preview effect is not executed). .
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆ A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Run 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion production will be executed (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", " Selecting an option in "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Spin" in FIG. 56) , display of "specific image 31e"), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect ( For example, at (a) T4) in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, A first performance (for example, a pseudo series 2 performance) consisting of a first suggestion notification performance (for example, "pseudo series 2 notification period") and a first suggestion production (for example, "pseudo series 2 variable period"), A second performance (for example, a pseudo series 3 performance) consisting of a second suggestion notification performance (for example, "pseudo series 3 notification period") and a second suggestion production (for example, "pseudo series 3 variation period"), After the predetermined timing, the third suggestion notification effect (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e") and the third suggestion effect (for example, the display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") can be executed. It is possible to execute a third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) consisting of a temporary stop display), and the ratio of executing the first effect and the third effect, and the first effect and the third effect. The rate at which the second effect and the third effect are executed is different (for example, in the number of pseudo consecutive runs of variable effect patterns 3, 9, 14, and 15 in FIG. Although the sequence is executed, the specific image 31e may not be displayed, but in the two pseudo-sequences of variable effect patterns 10 to 12 and 16 to 18, the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable effect patterns, so the first When the performance and the second performance are executed, the third performance is executed at a higher rate than when only the first performance is executed).
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆ A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), wherein the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Run 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion production will be executed (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", " Selecting an option in "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Spin" in FIG. 56) , display of "specific image 31e"), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect ( For example, at (a) T4) in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, The first suggestion notification effect (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period") and the first suggestion production (for example, "Pseudo series 2 variation period", "Pseudo series 3 variation period") After the predetermined timing, a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a second suggestion effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") can be executed. For example, it is possible to perform a second performance (for example, a background switching performance and a temporary stop display performance) consisting of a temporary stop display of the performance symbols 38 during a "temporary stop display period", and the above-mentioned case where the special game is not performed. If the result of the determination (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is negative), the ratio of executing the first performance and the second performance, and the result of the determination that the special game will be performed ( For example, if step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is affirmative), the ratio at which the first performance and the second performance are executed is different (for example, the variable performance patterns 7 to 18 in FIG. 53 are The variable effect pattern 30 is a variable effect pattern that displays a specific image 31e when it is a loss, and the variable effect pattern 30 is a variable effect pattern that displays a specific image 31e when it is a jackpot. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a jackpot).
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and a performance control means (for example, performance control board 120), the main control The means executes a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative, or step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process is affirmative). A determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game (e.g., jackpot determination process); and when the determination is made, identifying information (e.g., special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the system stops. An identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying the result, and a predetermined command (for example, each command executed by the main CPU 110a). a command transmitting means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process, and the effect control means receives commands from the command transmitting means. It is possible to receive the predetermined command (for example, step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), and to change the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, production symbol 38, small production symbol 38d), It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance (for example, fluctuating performance pattern 1 to fluctuating performance pattern 33) that stops the process, and to notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating performance (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). In the fluctuating performance, a suggestive performance (for example, "Pseudo-Run 2 fluctuation period", "Pseudo-Run 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "Full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period"), and suggestion notification performances that make you anticipate that the relevant suggestion production will be executed (for example, "Pseudo series 2 notification period", "Pseudo series 3 notification period", " Selecting an option in "Roulette Preview Performance" (for example, selecting "SP" in FIG. 56), displaying the step-up preview performance image 31p in "SU Preview Performance" (for example, displaying "Probable SU5 Full Spin" in FIG. 56) , display of "specific image 31e"), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect ( For example, at (a) T4) in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, Execute a first performance (e.g., a pseudo-series 2 performance) consisting of a first suggestion notification performance (e.g., "pseudo-sequence 2 notification period") and a first suggestion performance (e.g., "pseudo-sequence 2 variable period") This is possible, and after the predetermined timing, the second suggestion notification effect (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e") and the second suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period") display)) can be executed (e.g., a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect), and the execution time of the first effect (e.g., from the "pseudo series 2 notification period" to the "pseudo series 2 fluctuation period") can be executed. '') is different from the execution time of the second effect (for example, the time from the display of the ``specific image 31e'' to the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the ``temporary stop display period''). The time from the display of "31e" to the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" is shorter.
This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

1 Gaming machine 31 Image display device 32 Audio output device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c main RAM
120 Production control board 120a Sub CPU
120b sub ROM
120c sub RAM
150 Display/audio control section 155 Image control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means, an effect control means, and an operation means operable by a player,
The main control means is
a determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, an identification information display control means displays the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the identification information;
a command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined command;
The performance control means is
capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmitting means;
It is possible to perform a variation performance that can notify the result of the determination in response to varying the symbol corresponding to the identification information, temporarily stopping the symbol, and then permanently stopping the symbol,
In the variable performance, it is possible to execute a reach performance according to the result of the determination,
Notifying the result of the determination at a predetermined timing after starting the reach effect ;
A specific image can be displayed after the reach effect is completed by notification of the result of the determination and before the symbol is fixed and stopped;
While displaying the specific image , it is possible to make the pattern difficult to see;
It is possible to execute an operation performance that makes the player expect it in response to the operation of the operation means during the validity period that occurs during the execution of the variable performance,
Before displaying the specific image , it is possible to generate the validity period related to the operation performance,
While the specific image is displayed , generation of the validity period related to the operation effect can be restricted ;
The pattern can be changed into a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
Before displaying the specific image, it is possible to make the pattern visible in the first mode,
After the display of the specific image is finished, the symbol can be visually recognized in the second mode .